OWNER'S HANDBOOK
ON-LINE OWNER'S HANDBOOK
Referring to the owner's handbook on-line also gives you
access to the latest information available, easily identifi ed by
the bookmark, associated with this symbol:
If the "MyCitroën" function is not available on the CITROËN public
website for your country, you can fi nd your handbook at the following
address:
http://service.citroen.com
Select:
You can fi nd your handbook on the CITROËN website, under
"MyCitroën".
This personal and customisable space allows you to establish direct
and special contact with CITROËN.
The Vehicle documentation link in the home page (no registration is
needed),
the language,
the vehicle, its body style,
the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration
of your vehicle.
You have access to your handbook on line, together with the latest
information, identifi ed by the symbol:
CITROËN has a presence on every continent,
a complete product range,
bringing together technology and a permanent spirit of innovation,
for a modern and creative approach to mobility.
We thank you and congratulate you on your choice.
Your vehicle is fitted with only some of the
equipment described in this document,
depending on the trim level, version and the
specifications for the country in which it is sold.
The fitting of electrical equipment or
accessories which are not recommended
by CITROËN may result in a failure of your
vehicle's electronic system. Please note this
specific warning and contact a CITROËN
dealer to be shown the recommended
equipment and accessories.
At the wheel of your new vehicle,
getting to know each system,
each control, each setting,
makes your trips, your journeys
more comfortable and more enjoyable.
Happy motoring!
We draw your attention to the following...
Contents
Contents
6 FAMILIARISATION
34 ECO-DRIVING
388 VISUAL
SEARCH
394 ALPHABETICAL
INDEX
MONITORING
38 Instrument panels
42 Rev counter
43 Warning and indicator lamps
54 Indicators
57 Manual test
60 Customisation
Key
safety warning
additional information
contributes to the protection of the environment
programming a function with the
configuration menu
001
001
refer to the page indicated
MULTIFUNCTION
SCREENS
COMFORT ACCESS VISIBILITY
64 Monochrome screen C
68 Colour screen
70 Trip computer
78 Ventilation
80 Manual air conditioning
82 Dual-zone digital air
conditioning
86 Front demist - defrost
87 Rear screen demist - defrost
88 Front seats
92 Rear seats
93 Steering wheel adjustment
94 Mirrors
100 Remote control key
110 Alarm
113 Doors
115 Boot
116 Electric windows
118 Fuel tank
121 Misfuel prevention
(Diesel)
124 Lighting controls
125 Daytime running lamps
128 Automatic illumination of
headlamps
129 Welcome lighting
130 Headlamp adjustment
131 Directional lighting
133 Wiper controls
134 Automatic rain sensitive
wipers
138 Courtesy lamps
139 Interior mood lighting
140 Boot lamp
004
004
005
005
002
002
003
003
SAFETY DRIVINGFITTINGS CHILD SAFETY
194 Electric parking brake
202 Manual parking brake
203 Manual gearbox
204 Electronic gearbox
208 Automatic gearbox
212 Hill start assist
213 Gear effi ciency indicator
214 Tyre under-infl ation detection
216 Stop & Start
219 Blind spot sensors
223 Speed limiter
225 Cruise control
227 Parking space sensors
229 Parking sensors
176 Direction indicators
176 Hazard warning lamps
177 Horn
177 Emergency or assistance
call
178 Braking assistance systems
179 Trajectory control systems
(ESP)
181 Front seat belts
185 Airbags
160 Child seats
162 Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag
169 ISOFIX child seats
173 Child lock
144 Interior fi ttings
150 Front armrest
154 Boot fi ttings
008
008
009
009
006
006
007
007
CHECKS PRACTICAL
INFORMATION
TECHNICAL DATA AUDIO AND
TELEMATICS
235 Bonnet
236 Running out of fuel (Diesel)
237 Petrol engines
238 Diesel engines
239 Checking levels
242 Checks
248 Temporary puncture repair
kit
253 Changing a wheel
260 Snow chains
261 Changing a bulb
268 Changing a fuse
274 12 V battery
278 Energy economy mode
279 Changing a wiper blade
279 Very cold climate screen
280 Fitting roof bars
281 Towing the vehicle
283 Towing a trailer
285 Accessories
290 Petrol engines
291 Petrol weights
292 Diesel engines
293 Diesel weights
294 Dimensions
295 Identifi cation markings
299 Emergency or assistance
301 eMyWay
355 Audio system
012
012
013
013
010
010
011
011
Familiarisation
Familiarisation
Exterior
Parking sensors
This system measures the size of a free
parking space between two vehicles or
obstacles.
Stop & Start system
This system puts the engine temporarily into standby during
stops in the traffic (traffic lights, traffic jams, etc...). The engine
restarts automatically as soon as you want to move off. The
Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust
emissions, as well as noise levels when stationary.
227
216
Directional lighting
This lighting automatically provides
additional visibility when cornering.
131
Panoramic windscreen
This large glazed area provides
incomparable visibility and light in the
passenger compartment.
12
Cornering lighting
At low speed, this lighting comes on
automatically to improve vision when
cornering, at intersections, when parking...
making use of the front foglamp on the side
in question.
132
9
Familiarisation
Exterior
Welcome lighting
This additional exterior and interior lighting,
controlled remotely, makes your approach to
the vehicle easier when the light is poor.
Temporary puncture repair kit
This kit is a complete system, consisting of a
compressor and a sealant cartridge, for the
temporary repair of a tyre.
129
248
Under-infl ation detection
This system continuously monitors the tyre
pressures and alerts you in the event of under-
inflation.
214
Blind spot sensors
In certain conditions, this system
detects the presence of a vehicle in
the blind spot. It informs you by means
of a warning lamp in the corresponding
door mirror.
219
Exterior customising
stickers
When cleaning your car with a high
pressure jet wash, keep the end of the
lance at least 30 cm away from the
stickers.
100
Opening
A. Folding/unfolding the key
(first press this button).
3-button remote
control
When a sensor detects a low level of light,
the remote switching on of the dipped beam
headlamps, the sidelamps and the side spotlamps
makes your approach to the vehicle easier.
Welcome lighting
Complete or selective unlocking of
the vehicle
(rapid flashing of the direction
indicators).
Opening the windows
(hold until the desired position is reached).
Selective unlocking of the boot.
Normal locking
(press once; fixed lighting of the
direction indicators).
Closing the windows
(hold until the desired position is reached).
129
In the same way, the passenger compartment
lighting, such as the courtesy lamps and the
footwell lamps, comes on.
11
Familiarisation
118, 121
A. Opening the fuel filler flap.
Capacity of the fuel tank: approximately 60 litres.
Fuel tank
Opening
101, 115
1. Selective unlocking of the boot.
2. Opening the boot.
Boot
Panoramic windscreen
Blind
To open it, take the blind by its central
grip A , and pull it rearwards, guiding it to
the desired position.
To close it, take the blind by its central
grip A , and pull it forwards, guiding it to the
desired position.
The sun visor should be in the folded position
before moving the blind.
This includes a panoramic area in tinted glass to increase lighting and vision in the passenger compartment.
Fitted with a blind on each side to improve temperature control and a sun visor to avoid dazzle.
Sun visor
Fitted with a courtesy mirror and a ticket holder.
To avoid dazzle from the front, lower the
sun visor.
To avoid dazzle from the side, disengage
the sun visor from its central fixing and turn
it towards the side window.
Do not attach to or suspend heavy
objects from the blind and its guide
rails.
13
Familiarisation
Interior
Electronic gearbox
This system offers driving combining a fully
automatic mode and a manual mode.
Interior mood lighting
This dimmed lighting of the passenger
compartment improves visibility inside the
vehicle when the light is poor.
Audio and communication
systems
These systems benefit from the following
technologies: radio, CD player, USB player,
Bluetooth system, satellite navigation system
with colour screen, auxiliary sockets.
Audio system
204
139
355
301
Electric parking brake
It combines the functions of automatic
application on switching off the engine and
automatic release when moving off.
Manual application and release remain
possible.
194
eMyWay satellite navigation system
Massage function
This system gives a lumbar massage for a
period of 60 minutes. The massage is done in
6 cycles of 10 minutes each.
91
Instruments and controls
1. Controls for audio and telematic system.
2. Controls for Bluetooth system or telephone.
3. Steering lock and ignition.
4. Wiper / screenwash / trip computer control
stalk.
5. Instrument panel.
6. Driver's airbag.
Horn.
7. Cruise control / speed limiter controls.
8. Controls for optional functions.
9. Door mirror controls.
Electric window controls.
10. Storage compartment.
11. Manual headlamp height adjustment
Lower side switch panel.
12. Fuel filler flap opening switch.
Upper side switch panel.
13. Side adjustable air vent.
14. Front side window demisting vent.
15
Familiarisation
Instruments and controls
1. Steering wheel adjustment control.
2. Steering mounted control paddles for the
electronic gearbox.
3. Lighting and direction indicator control
stalk.
4. Speaker (tweeter).
5. Windscreen demisting vent.
6. Sunshine sensor.
7. Passenger's airbag.
8. Glove box / Audio/video sockets /
Passenger's airbag deactivation switch /
Fusebox.
9. Bonnet release.
10. Heated seat control.
11. Lumbar massage control.
12. Electric parking brake.
13. Gear lever for a manual gearbox or
selector lever for an electronic or automatic
gearbox.
14. Large multifunctional storage unit.
Roof consoles - Centre consoles
A. Rear view mirror.
B. Microphone for audio and telematic
system.
C. Interior mood lighting.
D. Emergency call / Assistance call.
E. Courtesy lamp / Map reading lamps.
1. Central adjustable air vents.
2. Monochrome screen and seat belt and
front airbag screen or colour and mapping
screen.
3. Audio system or eMyWay satellite
navigation system.
4. Central switch panel.
5. Heating / air conditioning controls.
6. USB port / auxiliary Jack socket and
cigarette lighter / 12 V accessory socket.
7. Gear lever or selector.
8. Manual or electric parking brake
9. Portable ashtray.
10. Front armrest.
17
Familiarisation
Sitting comfortably
Manual adjustment
88
Driver's seat
Forwards-backwards Height
Electric adjustment
Seat back angle
89
Sitting comfortably
Head restraint height and angle
Front seats
Other functions available...
Lumbar massage.
Heated seats.
90
1. Releasing the adjustment mechanism.
2. Adjustment for height and reach.
3. Locking the adjustment mechanism.
Steering wheel adjustment
93
As a safety precaution, these
operations must only be carried out
when stationary.
Lumbar
91
19
Familiarisation
For your comfort, the front armrest can be
adjusted for longitudinal position and for height,
depending on version.
Front armrest
149, 150
It also has a storage compartment.
Sitting comfortably
Sitting comfortably
Door mirrors
Adjustment
A. Selection of the mirror to be adjusted.
B. Adjustment of the position of the mirror in
the four directions.
C. De-selection of the mirror.
94
Other functions available...
Folding / Unfolding.
Automatic tilting of the mirror in reverse
gear for parking.
Blind spot sensors.
Rear view mirror
Manual day/night model
1. Selection of the "day" position of the mirror.
2. Adjustment of the mirror.
Automatic day/night model
96
A. Brightness detection in automatic day/night
mode.
B. Adjustment of the mirror.
1. Fastening the buckle.
2. Height adjustment.
Front seat belts
181
21
Familiarisation
Seeing clearly
Lighting
Ring A
Ring B
Direction indicators
124
Raise or lower the lighting stalk, passing the
point of resistance; the corresponding direction
indicators will flash for as long as the stalk
remains in this position.
176
Stalk A: windscreen wipers
Switching "AUTO" on / off
Press the stalk downwards and release.
Ring B: rear wiper
134
137
Lighting off.
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Sidelamps.
Dipped / main beam headlamps.
Front and rear foglamps.
Park.
Intermittent wipe.
Wash-wipe.
Three fl ashes
Press the lighting stalk up or down once,
without passing the point of resistance; the
corresponding direction indicators will flash
three times.
This function can be used at any speed, but it
is particularly useful when changing lane on
high-speed roads.
Wipers
133
Digital air conditioning: we recommend use of one of the three fully automatic modes by pressing the "AUTO" button.
Recommended interior settings
I require...
Manual Air Conditioning
Air distribution Air flow
Air recirculation /
Intake of outside air
Temperature Manual A/C
HOT
COLD
DEMISTING
DEFROSTING
Ventilation
23
Familiarisation
Monitoring
A. With the ignition on, the bars indicate the
level of fuel remaining.
B. With the engine running, its associated low
level warning lamp should go off.
C. With the ignition on, the oil level indicator
should show for a few seconds that the
level is OK or correct, depending on
version.
If the levels are not correct, top up the levels
which are low.
Gauges
38
1. With the ignition on, the orange and red
warning lamps come on.
2. With the engine running, these warning
lamps should go off.
If warning lamps remain on, refer to the page
concerned.
Warning lamps
43
A. Make an emergency call.
Central switch panels
177, 299
B. Access to CITROËN services.
177, 299
C . Hazard warning.
176
D . Central locking.
108
E . Black panel (black screen).
60
Monitoring
Illumination of the warning lamp indicates the
state of the system.
Side switch panel
180
B. Deactivate the parking sensors.
230
C. Deactivate the Stop & Start system.
217
D. Activate blind spot monitoring.
219
E. Activate the electric child lock.
173
F. Deactivate the volumetric alarm protection.
111
A. Deactivate the ESP/ASR system.
25
Familiarisation
Cruise control / speed limiter
controls
Steering wheel with
integrated controls
60
Optional functions controls
223, 225
59
2. Dashboard lighting dimmer.
304, 357
Audio system controls
304, 357
Bluetooth system or telephone
controls
1. Black panel (black screen).
40
or
Control of the type 2 instrument panel
central screen.
138
3. Courtesy lamp on / off.
227
or
Parking space sensors.
Monitoring
Passenger safety
1. Open the glove box.
2. Insert the key.
3. Select the position:
"OFF" (deactivation), with "rear facing" child seat,
"ON" (activation), with front passenger or
"forwards facing" child seat.
4. Remove the key keeping the switch in the
new position.
Passenger's front airbag
187
A. Front left seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.
B. Front right seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.
C. Rear right seat belt unfastened warning
lamp.
D. Rear centre seat belt unfastened warning
lamp.
E. Rear left seat belt unfastened warning
lamp.
F. Passenger's front airbag deactivated
warning lamp.
G. Passenger's front airbag activated warning
lamp.
Seat belts and passenger's
front airbag
181, 187
27
Familiarisation
105
1. Stop position.
2. Ignition on position.
3. Starting position.
Ignition switch
When switching the ignition on and off, the
speedometer needle, and the rev counter and
fuel gauge bars go to the extent of their travel
and then return to 0.
Starting
Your vehicle is fitted with a system which
holds your vehicle stationary momentarily,
the time to move your foot from the brake to
the accelerator, to help with moving off on a
gradient.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- certain conditions of gradient are met,
- the driver's door is closed.
212
Do not get out of the vehicle during
the hill start assist temporary holding
phase.
Hill start assist
Driving safely
Manual application / release
Manual application of the parking brake is
possible by pulling the control lever A .
With the ignition on, manual release of the
parking brake is possible by pressing the
brake pedal and pulling then releasing the
control lever A .
Electric parking brake
Automatic application / release
Press the accelerator pedal and let the clutch
pedal up (manual gearbox), the parking brake
is released automatically and progressively as
you move off.
With the vehicle at rest, on switching off
the engine the parking brake is applied
automatically.
If this warning lamp is on in the instrument
panel, the automatic application /
release is deactivated ; apply and release
the parking brake manually.
Before leaving the
vehicle, check that the
brake warning lamp in the
instrument panel and the P warning lamp in the
control lever A are on fixed (not flashing) .
194
With the engine running, on opening
the driver's door there is an audible
warning; apply the parking brake
manually.
Do not leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on; they might
release the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer or caravan or
if the slope might vary (transport on a
ferry, lorry, towing...) make a maximum
manual application with a long pull on
the control lever A to immobilise the
vehicle.
29
Familiarisation
Driving safely
This 6-speed gearbox offers a choice between
the comfort of fully automatic operation or the
pleasure of manual gear changing.
Electronic gearbox
1. Gear lever.
2. Steering mounted "-" control paddle.
3. Steering mounted "+" control paddle.
Display in the instrument panel
The gear engaged or the driving mode selected
appears in the instrument panel screen.
N. Neutral.
R. Reverse.
1 to 6. Gears engaged.
AUTO. Automated mode.
Moving off
Select position N and press the brake
pedal firmly while starting the engine.
Engage first gear by pulling the gear lever
1 towards position A or M ,
or
engage reverse by pushing the gear lever 1
towards position R .
Release the parking brake.
Take your foot off the brake pedal then
accelerate.
204
Driving safely
Automatic gearbox
This six-speed gearbox offers the choice of
automatic operation or the pleasure of manual
gear changing.
1. Gear lever.
2. "S" (sport) button.
3. " " (snow) button.
Display in the instrument panel
The driving mode selected and/or the gear
engaged appear in the left hand instrument
panel screen.
P. Park.
R. Reverse.
N. Neutral.
D. Drive (automatic).
S. Sport programme.
. Snow programme.
1 to 6. Gears engaged.
-. Invalid value in manual operation.
Moving off
With your foot on the brake, select
position P or N .
Start the engine.
then select position R , D or M .
Remove your foot from the brake pedal,
then move off.
208
31
Familiarisation
Stop & Start
Engine going into STOP mode
216
The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel and the engine is
automatically put into standby:
- with a manual gearbox; at speeds below
12 mph (20 km/h), when you put the gear
lever into neutral and release the clutch
pedal,
- with an electronic gearbox; at speeds
below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press
the brake pedal or put the gear lever in
position N .
Engine going into START mode
Deactivation / Reactivation
You can deactivate the system at any time by
pressing the "ECO OFF" button; the button's
warning lamp comes on.
217
217
The system is reactivated automatically
every time you start the engine with
the key.
Before refuelling or doing anything
under the bonnet, you must switch off
the ignition with the key.
The "ECO" warning lamp goes off
and the engine restarts automatically:
- with a manual gearbox; when you fully
depress the clutch pedal,
- with an electronic gearbox;
● with the gear lever in position A or M ,
when you release the brake pedal,
● or gear lever in position N and brake
pedal released, when you change to
position A or M ,
● or when you engage reverse.
In certain circumstances the STOP mode may
not be available; the "ECO" warning lamp
flashes for a few seconds then goes off.
In certain condition, START mode may engage
automatically; the "ECO" warning lamp flashes
then goes off.
Driving safely
Driving safely
Activate the function by pressing control
switch A ; the button's warning lamp
comes on.
Blind spot sensors
219
The warning lamp located in the door mirror
comes on to warn you that a vehicle has arrived
in the blind spot detection zone.
Select the function by pressing control
switch B ; the corresponding warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel.
Operate the direction indicators on the side
with the space to be measured; a message
appears to confirm measurement is in
progress.
Drive at a speed below 12 mph (20 km/h)
during measurement.
Parking space sensors
One of these messages appears to indicate
the level of difficulty of the manouevre:
- Parking possible.
227
- Parking difficult.
- Parking not advised.
33
Familiarisation
Driving safely
1. Limiter mode On / Off.
2. Decrease the programmed value.
3. Increase the programmed value.
4. Speed limiter On / Off.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds.
Speed limiter "LIMIT"
222
1. Cruise control mode On / Off.
2. Programme a speed / Decrease the
programmed value.
3. Programme a speed / Increase the
programmed value.
4. Cruise control Off / Resume.
5. Display the list of memorised speeds.
Cruise control "CRUISE"
222
The cruise control or speed limiter mode
appears in the instrument panel when it is
selected.
Display in the instrument panel
The values must be set with the engine running.
223
225
In order to be programmed or activated, the
vehicle speed must be higher than 25 mph
(40 km/h), with at least fourth gear engaged
on a manual gearbox (second gear for an
electronic or automatic gearbox).
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions.
Optimise the use of your
gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently
and change up without waiting. During
acceleration change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox,
give preference to automatic mode and avoid
pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or
suddenly.
The gear efficiency indicator invites you
to change up: as soon as the indication to
change up is displayed in the instrument
panel, follow it straight away.
With an electronic or automatic gearbox, this
indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use
engine braking rather than the brake pedal,
and press the accelerator progressively. These
practices contribute towards a reduction in
fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions and also
helps reduce the background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of
the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h)
when the traffic is flowing well.
Control the use of your
electrical equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by
opening the windows and air vents before using
the air conditioning.
Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows
and leave the air vents open.
Remember to make use of equipment that can
help keep the temperature in the passenger
compartment down (sunroof and window
blinds...).
Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has
automatic regulation, as soon as the desired
temperature is attained.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
controls, if not automatic.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
35
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting
your multimedia devices (film, music, video
game...), you will contribute towards limiting
the consumption of electrical energy, and so
of fuel.
Disconnect your portable devices before
leaving the vehicle.
Limit the causes of excess
consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the
heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as
close as possible to the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack,
bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in
preference.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and
refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations
on maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when
cold, referring to the label in the door
aperture, driver's side.
Carry out this check in particular:
- before a long journey,
- at each change of season,
- after a long period out of use.
Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on
any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine
oil, oil filter, air filter...) and observe the
schedule of operations recommended by the
manufacturer.
When refuelling, do not continue after
the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any
overflow.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps
when the level of light does not require their
use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off,
particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm
up much faster while driving.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after
the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilometres) that you
will see the fuel consumption settle down to a
consistent average.
001
Instruments and controls
Customisable colour instrument panel - Type 1
1. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min).
2. Gear efficiency indicator or gear lever
position and gear engaged (electronic or
automatic gearbox).
3. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h).
4. Cruise control or speed limiter setting.
5. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h).
6. Engine oil level indicator.
Dials and screens Control buttons
7. Service indicator
(miles or km) then,
total mileage recorder.
These two functions are displayed
successively on switching on the ignition.
Lighting dimmer setting (when making an
adjustment).
8. Trip mileage recorder (miles or km).
9. Fuel gauge and associated low fuel
warning lamp.
10. Range (miles or km).
A. Dial COLOUR: customisation of the
background colour of the dials.
B. Screen COLOUR: customisation of the
background colour of the screens.
C. Lighting dimmer (available in night mode).
D. Reminder of the servicing information
Reset the service indicator or the trip
mileage recorder.
39
Monitoring
1. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min).
2. Gear efficiency indicator or gear lever
position and gear for an electronic or
automatic gearbox.
3. Speedometer (mph or km/h).
4. Central screen.
5. Fuel gauge and associated low fuel level
warning lamp.
Dials and screens
6. Trip mileage recorder (miles or km).
7. Service spanner (if a service is due or
missed),
total mileage recorder.
(miles or km)
Control buttons
Customisable colour instrument panel - Type 2
A. Dial COLOUR: customisation of the
background colour of the dials.
B. Screen COLOUR: customisation of the
background colour of the screens.
C. Dashboard lighting dimmer (in night mode).
D. Start a manual test (procedure for checking
the status of systems and display of vehicle
alerts).
Reset service indicator or trip mileage
recorder.
Type 2 instrument panel central screen and controls
1. Speed limiter or cruise control settings.
2. Engine oil level indicator.
Reminder of the servicing information.
These functions are displayed successively
on switching on the ignition, after the
welcome sequence and before display of
the active available functions.
Alert or information messages may be
displayed temporarily.
This group of controls allows:
- when stationary , configuration of the
vehicle, central screen and instrument
panel parameters (driving and comfort
systems, language, units, sounds...),
- when stationary and while driving ,
scrolling the active functions available
(trip computer, navigation-guidance...).
Controls
There is a button and a thumb wheel to control
the central screen in the instrument panel:
A. button on the end of the wiper stalk:
run through the various active functions
available.
B. thumb wheel on the left of the steering
column,
- rotation (other than menu): scroll through
the list of active functions available,
- press: main menu, confirm the selection,
- rotation (in a menu): move up or down in
the menu.
41
Monitoring
Press thumb wheel B for access to the
main menu and select one of the following
functions:
- "Vehicle parameters",
- "Display adjustment",
- "Choice of sounds".
Turn the thumb wheel B to move around in
the instrument panel central screen.
Press the thumb wheel B again to confirm
the selection.
This menu is used to activate or deactivate
certain driving and comfort systems, classified
in different categories:
- "Access to the vehicle" (see "Access"
section):
● "Plip action" (Selective unlocking of the
driver's door),
● "Unlocking only boot" (Selective
unlocking of the boot).
- "Driving assistance":
● "Parking brake automatic" (Automatic
electric parking brake; see "Driving"
section),
● "Rear wipe in reverse gear" (Rear wiper
coupled to reverse gear; see "Visibility"
section),
● "Speeds memorised" (Memorising
speeds; see "Driving" section).
- "Vehicle lighting" (see "Visibility" section):
● "Directional headlamps" (Main/additional
directional lighting),
● "Daytime lights" (Daytime running
lamps).
- "Interior lighting" (see "Visibility" section):
● "Follow-me-home" (Automatic timed
operation of headlamps),
● "Welcome lighting" (Interior/exterior
welcome lighting).
Vehicle parameters Main menu
The main menu and its associated
functions can only be accessed when
stationary.
A message appears in the instrument
panel central screen, above a certain
speed threshold, indicating that the
main menu cannot be displayed.
Approaching the maximum engine speed,
the bars are displayed in red and flash,
to indicate to you the need to change up a gear.
Rev counter
Choice of sounds
This menu allows you to choose a family of
polyphonic sounds from the four available.
These sounds are grouped together in a family
and are adapted to suit the situation and
context (alert, confirmation, rejection, direction
indicators, lighting left on, key in ignition...).
Display confi guration
This menu is used to configure:
- the display language of the central screen,
from a pre-defined list,
- the units: temperature (°Celsius or
°Fahrenheit) and fuel consumption
(l/100 km, mpg or km/l),
- the graphical presentation of the central
screen, from a pre-defined list.
43
Monitoring
Visual indicators which inform the driver of the
occurrence of a malfunction (warning lamp)
or of the operation of a system (operation or
deactivation indicator lamp).
Warning and indicator lamps
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched on.
When the engine is started, these warning
lamps should go off.
If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the
information on the warning lamp in question.
Associated warnings
The illumination, fixed or flashing, of certain
warning lamps may be accompanied by
an audible signal and a message in the
multifunction screen or in the type 2 instrument
panel central screen.
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is
being driven, the illumination of one of the
following warning lamps indicates a malfunction
which requires action on the part of the driver.
The warning comes on in the instrument panel
or appears in the type 2 instrument panel
central screen.
If your vehicle has a screen, a warning lamp coming on is always accompanied by the
display of an additional message, to assist you in identifying the problem.
If you encounter any problems, do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
STOP fixed, alone or
associated with
another warning lamp,
accompanied by an
audible signal and a
message in the screen.
Illumination of this warning lamp is
associated with a serious fault with
the braking system, power steering,
engine lubrication system or cooling
system.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so as there is a risk that
the engine will cut out while driving.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Maximum
coolant
temperature
fixed red. The temperature of the cooling system
is too high.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Wait until the engine has cooled down before topping
up the level, if necessary.
If the problem persists, contact a CITROËN dealer or
qualified workshop.
Engine oil
pressure
fixed. There is a fault with the engine
lubrication system.
You must stop as soon it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
45
Monitoring
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Battery charge fixed. The battery charging circuit has a fault
(dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut
alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is
started.
If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Braking fixed, associated with
the STOP warning
lamp.
The braking system fluid level has
dropped significantly.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Top up with brake fluid recommended by CITROËN.
If the problem persists, have the system checked by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated with
the electric parking
brake malfunction
warning lamp, if the
parking brake is
released.
The braking system has a fault. You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park, switch off the ignition and contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
+ fixed, associated with
the STOP and ABS
warning lamps.
The electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) system has a fault.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Electric parking
brake
flashing. The application or release of the
electric parking brake was interrupted.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
Park on level ground, switch off the ignition and
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
Electric
parking brake
malfunction
fixed. The electric parking brake has a fault. Automatic application/release is no longer possible.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay.
The parking brake can be released manually using the
emergency release procedure.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the "Driving" section.
Door(s) open fixed if the speed is
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
A door or the boot is still open. Close the door or boot.
fixed and accompanied
by an audible signal
if the speed is above
6 mph (10 km/h).
* According to country.
Seat belt not
fastened/
unfastened *
fixed, then flashing,
accompanied by an
increasing audible
signal.
The driver or front passenger has not
buckled or has unbuckled their seat
belt.
Pull on the belt in question and insert the tongue in
the buckle.
This warning repeats the seat belt information given
by the roof console warning lamps.
At least one rear passenger has
unbuckled their seat belt.
47
Monitoring
Service temporarily,
accompanied by a
message.
A minor malfunction has occurred for
which there is no specific warning
lamp.
Identify the malfunction by reading the message
displayed in the screen, such as, for example:
- the opening of the doors, boot or bonnet,
- the engine oil level,
- the remote control battery,
- the tyre pressures,
- saturation of the particle emission filter on
Diesel vehicles (see "Checks - § Checks/Particle
emissions filter").
For any other malfunctions, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
fixed, accompanied
by a message and an
audible signal.
A major malfunction has occurred
for which there is no specific warning
lamp.
Identify the malfunction by reading the message
displayed in the screen and contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Particle
emissions filter
(Diesel)
fixed, accompanied
by an audible signal
message on the risk of
blockage of the particle
emissions filter.
This indicates that the particle
emissions filter is starting to become
saturated.
As soon as driving conditions allow, regenerate the
filter by driving at a speed of at least 35 mph (60 km/h)
until the warning lamp goes off.
fixed, accompanied by
an audible signal and
and a message that the
particle emissions filter
additive level is too low.
This indicates the low level of the
additive reservoir.
Have the reservoir topped up as soon as possible by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
fixed. The anti-lock braking system has
a fault.
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Dynamic stability
control (ESP/
ASR)
flashing. The ESP/ASR regulation is active. The system optimises traction and improves the
directional stability of the vehicle.
fixed, associated with
illumination of the indicator
lamp in the " ESP OFF "
button, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message.
The ESP/ASR or hill start assist
system has a fault.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Engine
autodiagnosis
system
flashing. The engine management system has
a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
fixed. The emission control system has a
fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
workshop without delay.
Low fuel level fixed, accompanied by
and audible signal and
a message.
When it first comes on there remains
approximately 6 litres of fuel in the
tank.
At this point, you begin to use the fuel
reserve.
Refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of
fuel.
Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp will
come on every time the ignition is switched on,
accompanied by an audible signal and a message.
This audible signal and message are repeated
with increasing frequency as the fuel level drops
towards "0".
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 60 litres .
Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel,
as this could damage the emission control and
injection systems.
49
Monitoring
Power steering fixed. The power steering has a fault. Drive carefully at reduced speed.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Under-inflation fixed. The pressure in one or more wheels
is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as possible.
This check should preferably be carried out when the
tyres are cold.
+ flashing then fixed,
accompanied by the
Service warning lamp.
The tyre pressure monitoring system
has a fault or no sensor is detected
on one of the wheels.
Under-inflation detection is not assured.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Directional
headlamps
flashing. The directional headlamps system
has a fault.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Foot on the brake
pedal
fixed. The brake pedal is not pressed. With an electronic gearbox, press the brake pedal to
start the engine (lever in position N ).
If you wish to release the parking brake without
pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain
on.
flashing. With an electronic gearbox, if you hold
the vehicle on a rising incline using
the accelerator for too long, the clutch
overheats.
Use the brake pedal and/or the electric parking brake.
Airbags temporarily. This lamp comes on for a few
seconds when you turn on the
ignition, then goes off.
This lamp should go off when the engine is started.
If it does not go off, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
fixed. One of the airbag or seat belt
pretensioner systems has a fault.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Left-hand
direction indicato r
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed down.
Right-hand
direction indicator
flashing with buzzer. The lighting stalk is pushed up.
Sidelamps fixed. The lighting control is in the
"Sidelamps" position.
On vehicle where the daytime running lamps are deactivated,
if the lighting control is in the "AUTO" position, the sidelamps
come on as a luminous signature of the vehicle.
Dipped beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped beam
headlamps" position or in the "AUTO"
position in conditions of low light.
Main beam
headlamps
fixed. The lighting stalk is pulled towards
you.
Pull the stalk again to return to dipped beam
headlamps.
Front foglamps fixed. The front foglamps are switched on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off
the front foglamps.
Rear foglamps fixed. The rear foglamps are switched on. Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards to switch off the
rear foglamps.
Hazard warning
lamps
flashing with audible
signal.
The hazard warning lamps switch,
located on the dashboard, has been
operated.
The left-hand and right-hand direction indicators and
their associated indicator lamps flash simultaneously.
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
It may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message in the screen.
51
Monitoring
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Parking brake fixed. The parking brake is applied or not
properly released.
Release the parking brake to switch off the warning
lamp, keeping your foot on the brake pedal.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the parking brake, refer to the
"Parking brake" and "Electric parking brake" sections.
Electric parking
brake
fixed. The electric parking brake is applied. Release the electric parking brake to switch off the
warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal,
pull the electric brake control.
Observe the safety recommendations.
For more information on the electric parking brake,
refer to the "Driving" section.
Deactivation of
the automatic
functions of the
electric parking
brake
fixed. The "automatic application"
(on switching off the engine) and
"automatic release" functions are
deactivated or faulty.
Activate the function (according to country) via the
vehicle configuration menu or contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Diesel engine
pre-heating
fixed. The ignition switch is at the
2nd position (ignition on).
Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting.
The period of illumination of the warning lamp is
determined by the climatic conditions (up to about
thirty seconds in extreme climatic conditions).
If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and
then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again,
then start the engine.
Lighting dimmer fixed. The lighting dimmer is making an
adjustment.
You can adjust the level of illumination of the
instruments between 1 and 16.
Passenger's
airbag system
fixed in the seat belt
and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps
display.
The control switch, located in the glove
box, has been placed in the "ON"
position.
The passenger's front airbag is activated.
In this case, do not install a "rear facing"
child seat.
Move the control switch to the "OFF" position
to deactivate the passenger's front airbag.
In this case, you can install a "rear facing" child seat.
Automatic wiping fixed. The wiper control is pushed
downwards.
Automatic front wiping is activated.
To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control
stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Stop & Start fixed. When the vehicle stops (red lights,
traffic jams,...) the Stop & Start
system has put the engine into STOP
mode.
The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
move off.
flashes for a few
seconds, then goes
off.
STOP mode is temporarily
unavailable.
or
START mode is invoked
automatically.
For more information on special cases with STOP
mode and START mode, refer to the "Stop & Start"
section.
Parking space
sensors
fixed. The parking space sensors function
is selected.
To start measurement, operate the direction indicator
on the side of the space to be measured, and do not
exceed 12 mph (20 km/h). A message is displayed
once the measurement has been completed.
53
Monitoring
Passenger's
airbag system
fixed in the instrument
panel and/or seat belt
and front passenger's
airbag warning lamps
display.
The control switch, located in the
glove box, is set to the OFF position.
The passenger's front airbag is
deactivated.
Set the control to the "ON" position to activate
the passenger's front airbag.
In this case, do not fit a child seat in the rear-facing
position.
Warning lamp is on Cause Action/Observations
Deactivation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally.
This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message on the multifunction screen.
This information is displayed for a few seconds
when the ignition is switched on, at the same
time as the service information.
Engine oil level indicator
The vehicle must be on level ground
and the engine must have been off
for more than 30 minutes for this level
check to be accurate.
Oil level correct
Oil level incorrect
This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL"
or the display of a specific message in
the instrument panel, coupled with the service
warning lamp and accompanied by an audible
signal.
If the low oil level is confirmed by a check
using the dipstick, the level must be topped up
to avoid damage to the engine.
Oil level indicator error
This is indicated by the flashing of "OIL--"
or the display of a specific message in the
instrument panel. Contact a CITROËN or a
qualified workshop.
There are 2 marks on the
dipstick:
- A = max; never exceed
this level (risk of damage to
the engine),
- B = min; top up the level via
the oil filler cap, using the
correct grade of oil for your
engine.
Dipstick
Refer to the "Checks" section to locate the
dipstick and the oil filler cap on your engine.
55
Monitoring
This information is displayed for a few seconds
after switching on the ignition. It informs the
driver when the next service is due,
in accordance with the manufacturer's
servicing schedule.
The point at which the service is due is
calculated from the last service indicator zero
reset. It is determined by two parameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last service.
Service indicator
Between 600 miles (1 000 km)
and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner symbolising the service
operations comes on. The distance recorder
display line or a specific message in the
instrument panel central screen indicates the
distance remaining before the next service is due.
For example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain
before the next service is due.
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the screen indicates:
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain
before the next service is due
Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before
the next service is due.
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the screen indicates:
A few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on to
indicate that a service must be carried out
soon.
A few seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner goes off ; the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The screen then
indicates the total and trip distances.
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service information
appears in the instrument panel central screen.
A few seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The spanner remains on .
The distance remaining may be
weighted by the time factor, depending
on the type of driving.
Therefore, the spanner may also come
on if you have exceeded the two year
service interval.
Service indicator zero reset
After each service, the service indicator must
be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero is as
follows:
switch off the ignition,
press and hold the ".../000" trip distance
recorder zero reset button,
switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown,
when the screen indicates "=/0" and the
spanner disappears, release the button.
This operation cannot be carried
out while a reminder of the servicing
information is being displayed.
Following this operation, if you wish to
disconnect the battery, lock the vehicle
and wait at least five minutes for the
zero reset to be registered.
Recalling the service information
You can recall the service information at any
time.
Briefly press the ".../000" trip distance
recorder zero reset button.
The service information is displayed for a
few seconds, in the total distance recorder
line or in the type 2 instrument panel
central screen.
Service overdue
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the spanner flashes to indicate that the service
must be carried out as soon as possible.
Example: the service is overdue by 180 miles
(300 km).
For a few seconds after the ignition is switched on,
the screen indicates:
57
Monitoring
Manual test in the type 2 instrument panel central screen
This function allows you to check the status of the vehicle systems (reminder of the "activated"/"deactivated" status of the configurable functions) and to
display the alerts log.
With the engine running, to start a manual
test, briefly press the ".../000" button on
the instrument panel.
The following information appears successively
in the instrument panel central screen:
- engine oil level indicator
(see corresponding section),
- service indicator (see corresponding
section),
- under-inflation detection (if your vehicle
is fitted with this system; see the "Safety"
section),
- current warnings and alert messages,
if any (see corresponding section for the
warning lamp or system concerned),
- status of configurable functions
(see "Multifunction screens").
This information also appears every
time the ignition is switched on
(automatic test).
The total and trip distances are displayed for
thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off,
when the driver's door is opened and when the
vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Distance recorders
Total distance recorder
Trip distance recorder
Measures the distance travelled since it was
last reset to zero by the driver.
With the ignition on, press and hold this
button until zeros appear.
Measures the total distance travelled by the
vehicle since its first registration.
59
Monitoring
Lighting dimmer
Permits manual adjustment of the brightness of
the instruments and controls in relation to the
exterior brightness. Only operates when the
vehicle lighting is on in night mode.
Activation
Press button A to change the brightness of
the instruments and controls.
When the lighting reaches the minimum
setting, release the button, then press
again to increase it.
or
When the lighting reaches the maximum
setting, release the button, then press
again to reduce it.
When the lighting reaches the level of
brightness required, release the button.
This indicator and the lighting
value appear in the middle of the
instrument panel during adjustment
to show the lighting level compared
to the 16 levels available.
You can also modify the level of lighting by
turning the thumb wheel B , located on the left
of the steering wheel:
upwards; to reduce the level,
downwards; to increase the level.
Deactivation
When the vehicle lighting is off, or in day mode
(daytime running lamps on), pressing the button
or turning the thumb wheel does not have any
effect.
System allowing certain screens to be switched
off for night driving.
The instrument panel remains on with
the analogue vehicle speed, electronic or
automatic gearbox gear selected, cruise control
or speed limiter information, if in use, and the
low fuel alerts as appropriate.
If there is an alert or a change in a function
or to a setting, the black panel mode is
interrupted.
Black panel (black screen)
Activation
With the vehicle lighting on, press this
button again to activate the black panel.
Press once more to illuminate on the
various screens again.
In order to retain the digital reading of the
speed in km/h, activation of black panel mode
is prohibited in countries that use metric units.
In the instrument panel, you can change the
colour of its dials (button A ) independently from
that of the screens (button B ).
There are five colour variants, from white to
blue.
press the appropriate button as many times
as needed to obtain the desired colour.
Customising the instrument
panel colours
61
Monitoring
Customising the polyphonic
sounds
This menu allows you to choose a family of
polyphonic sounds from the four available.
These sounds are grouped together in a family
and are adapted to suit the situation and
context (alert, confirmation, rejection, direction
indicators, lighting left on, key in ignition...).
For the type 2 customisable
colour instrument
Press the thumb wheel for access to the
main menu.
Select the "Choice of sounds" line and
confirm.
Select the desired family of sounds and
confirm.
Save the modifications by confirming "OK".
For safety reasons, the driver must
only carry out these operation when
stationary.
For safety reasons, these operations
are only possible when stationary.
For the type 1 customisable
colour instrument panel
Press the "MENU" button for access to the
main menu.
Select the "Personalisation-configuration"
menu and confirm.
Select the "Choice of sounds" line and
confirm.
Select the desired family of sounds and
confirm.
Save the modifications by confirming "OK".
002
Multifunction screens
Monochrome screen C
This displays the following information:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature (this flashes if there is
a risk of ice),
- parking sensor information,
- parking space measurement,
- current audio source,
- telephone or Bluetooth system information,
- trip computer (refer to the end of the
section),
- alert messages,
- settings menus for the screen and the
vehicle equipment.
Displays in the screen
From the control panel of your audio system,
you can press:
button A to chooses between the display
of audio information in full screen or the
shared display of audio and trip computer
information,
the "MENU" button for access to the main
menu ,
the " " or " " buttons to scroll through the
items on the screen,
the " " or " " buttons to change a setting
value,
the "OK" button to confirm,
or
the "Back" button to abandon the
operation in progress.
Controls
Press the "MENU" button for access to the
main menu :
- "Multimedia",
- "Telephone",
- "Trip computer",
- "Bluetooth connection",
- "Personalisation-configuration",
Press the " " or " " button to select the
menu required, then confirm by pressing
the "OK" button.
Main menu
65
Multifunction screens
With the audio system switched on, this
menu allows you to activate or deactivate the
functions associated with use of the radio
(RDS, DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText
(TXT) display) or to choose the media play
mode (Normal, Random, Random all, Repeat).
For more information on the "Multimedia"
application, refer to the "Audio and Telematics"
section.
"Multimedia" menu "Trip computer" menu
This menu allows you to view information on
the status of the vehicle.
Warning log
This summarises the status and warning
messages for systems (active, not active or
faulty), displaying them in succession in the
multifunction screen.
Press the "MENU" button for access to the
main menu.
Press the arrows, then the "OK" button to
select the " Trip computer " menu.
In the " Trip computer " menu, select the
"Warning log" line and confirm.
"Telephone" menu
With the audio system switched on, this menu
allows you to make a call or view the various
telephone directories.
For more information on the "Telephone"
application, refer to the "Audio and Telematics"
section.
"Bluetooth
connection" menu
Wit the audio system on, this menu allows a
Bluetooth device (telephone, media player)
to be connected or disconnected and the
connection mode to be defined (hands-free,
playing audio files).
For more information on the "Bluetooth
connection" application, refer to the "Audio and
Telematics" section.
Defi ne the vehicle parameters
- "Driving assistance":
● "Parking brake automatic" (Automatic
electric parking brake; see the "Driving"
section),
● "Rear wipe in reverse gear" (Rear
wiper coupled to reverse gear; see the
"Visibility" section),
● "Speeds memorised" (Memorising
speeds; see the "Driving" section).
- "Vehicle lighting" (see the "Visibility"
section):
● "Directional headlamps" (Main /
additional directional lighting),
● "Daytime lights" (Daytime running
lamps).
- "Interior lighting" (see the "Visibility"
section:
● "Follow-me-home headlamps"
(Automatic operation of headlamps after
switching off the ignition),
● "Welcome lighting" (Exterior and interior
welcome lighting).
For example: setting of the duration of the
"follow-me-home" lighting
Press the " " or " " buttons, to select the
"Define the vehicle parameters" menu,
then the " OK " button.
Press the " " or " " buttons to select the
"Interior lighting" line, then the "OK" button;
then follow the same procedure to select the
"Follow-me-home headlamps" line.
This menu allows you to activate or deactivate
the following equipment, classified in different
categories:
- "Access to the vehicle" (see the "Access"
section):
● "Plip action" (Selective unlocking of the
driver's door),
● "Unlocking boot only" (Selective
unlocking of the boot).
"Personalisation-
configuration" menu
This menu gives access to the following
functions:
- "Define the vehicle parameters",
- "Choice of language",
- "Display configuration",
- "Choice of sounds".
67
Multifunction screens
Press the " " or " " buttons to set the
value required (15, 30 or 60 seconds), then
press the "OK" button to confirm.
Choice of language
Once this menu has been selected, you can
choose the language used by the display from
a pre-defined list.
Display confi guration
This menu gives access to the following
settings:
- "Choice of units",
- "Date and time adjustment",
- "Display parameters",
- "Brightness".
Choice of sounds
This menu allows you to choose a family of
polyphonic sounds from the four available.
These sounds are grouped together in a family
and are adapted to suit the situation and
context (alert, confirmation, rejection, direction
indicators, lighting left on, key in ignition...).
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Press the " " or " " buttons, then
the "OK" button to select the "OK" box
and confirm or press the "Back" button to
cancel.
Adjusting the date and time
Press the " " or " " button to display
the "Display configuration" menu, then
press "OK" .
Press the " " or " " button to select the
"Date and time adjustment" button, then
press "OK" .
Press the " " or " " button to select
the setting to modify. Confirm by
pressing "OK" , then modify the setting and
confirm again to save the modification.
Adjust the settings one by one, confirming
with the "OK" button.
Press the " " or " " button, then the "OK"
button to select the "OK" box and confirm
or the "Back" button to cancel.
Colour screen
It displays the following information
automatically and directly:
- time,
- date,
- altitude,
- ambient temperature (the value displayed
flashes if there is a risk of ice),
- parking sensor information,
- parking space measurement,
- audio functions,
- directory and telephone information,
- satellite navigation system information.
Displays in the screen
From the navigation system control panel, to
select one of the applications:
press the dedicated "RADIO" , "MUSIC" ,
"NAV" , "TRAFFIC" , "PHONE" or
"SETUP" button for access to the
corresponding menu,
turn the dial A to select a function, an item
in a list,
press button B to confirm the selection,
or
press the "ESC" button to abandon the
current operation and return to the previous
display.
Controls
For more information on these applications,
refer to the "Audio and Telematics" section.
69
Multifunction screens
"SETUP" menu
Press the "SETUP" button for access to its
menu. You can choose from the following
functions:
- "Display configuration",
- "Voice synthesis".
Display confi guration
This menu is used to set the brightness of the
screen, the screen colour scheme and the date
and time.
Voice synthesis
This menu is used to adjust the volume for
guidance messages and to select the type of
voice (male or female).
For safety reasons, configuration of the
multifunction screen by the driver must
only be done when stationary.
Setting the date and time
- Press SETUP .
- Select "Display configuration" and confirm.
- Select "Set date and time" and confirm.
Select "Minute adjustment via GPS" to have the
minutes set automatically by satellite reception.
- Select the setting to modify. Confirm it by
pressing OK , then modify the setting and
confirm again to save the modification.
- Adjust the settings one by one.
- Select "OK" in the screen then confirm to
save the setting.
Trip computer
Monochrome screen C
Information displays
You can choose between two types of display
by pressing button A :
- the trip computer information appears
temporarily above the audio information,
displayed permanently in full screen,
or
- the trip computer and audio information
both appear permanently in a shared
screen.
Press the button, located at the end of
the wiper stalk , to display the various trip
computer tabs in succession.
System that gives you information on the journey in progress (range, fuel consumption…).
71
Multifunction screens
- the current information tab with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● the Stop & Start time counter.
- the trip "1" tab with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.
- the trip "2" tab with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.
Trip zero reset
When the trip required is displayed, press
the button on the end of the wiper stalk for
more than two seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
Type 2 central instrument panel screen
Information displays
- Display of instantaneous information with:
● the range,
● the current fuel consumption,
● Stop & Start time counter,
- Display of trip "1" with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the first trip.
- Display of trip "2" with:
● the distance travelled,
● the average fuel consumption,
● the average speed,
for the second trip.
● information on the current audio source,
● black screen,
● navigation-guidance messages.
Press the button, located at the end of the
wiper stalk
or
turn the thumb wheel, located on the left of
the steering wheel ,
to display the following information in turn:
● reminder of the speed,
● instantaneous information,
● trip "1" ,
● trip "2" ,
73
Multifunction screens
Trip zero reset
When the required trip is displayed, press
the thumb wheel located on the left of the
steering wheel or the button on the end of
the wiper stalk for more than two seconds.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use
is identical.
For example, trip "1" can be used for daily
figures and trip "2" for monthly figures.
A few definitions…
This value may vary following a change
in the style of driving or the relief,
resulting in a significant change in the
current fuel consumption.
If dashes are displayed continuously
while driving in place of the digits,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
The fuel consumption of your vehicle will
be higher than the official figures obtained
by CITROËN during the first 3 000 miles
(5 000 km) of the vehicle's life.
Range
(miles or km)
This indicates the distance
which can still be travelled with the fuel
remaining in the tank in relation to the average
fuel consumption over the last few miles
(kilometres) travelled.
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed. After filling with at least
5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is
displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
Current fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
This is the average fuel consumption during the
last few seconds.
Average fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
This is the average fuel consumption since the
last trip computer zero reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
This is the average speed calculated
since the last trip computer zero reset
(ignition on).
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
This indicates the distance
travelled since the last trip computer zero reset.
Stop & Start time
counter
(minutes/seconds or hours/
minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, a time
counter calculates the time spent in STOP
mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is
switched on with the key.
75
Multifunction screens
003
Comfort
Ventilation
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger compartment
is filtered and originates either from the outside via
the grille located at the base of the windscreen or
from the inside in air recirculation mode.
Air treatment
The incoming air follows various routes
depending on the controls selected by the
driver:
- direct arrival in the passenger
compartment (air intake),
- passage through a heating circuit (heating),
- passage through a cooling circuit (air
conditioning).
Control panel
The controls of this system are grouped
together on control panel A on the centre
console.
Air distribution
1. Windscreen demisting-defrosting vents.
2. Front side window demisting-defrosting
vents.
3. Side adjustable air vents.
4. Central adjustable air vents.
5. Air outlets to the front footwells.
6. Air nozzles to the front footwells.
7. Air outlets to the rear footwells.
79
Comfort
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
If after an extended stop in sunshine,
the interior temperature is very
high, first ventilate the passenger
compartment for a few moments.
Put the air flow control at a setting high
enough to quickly change the air in the
passenger compartment.
The air conditioning system does not
contain chlorine and does not present
any danger to the ozone layer.
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance
guidelines below:
To obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well
as the air extractor located in the boot.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation
of the air conditioning system.
Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month
to keep it in perfect working order.
Ensure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter
elements replaced regularly.
We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its
special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the
occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic
symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits).
To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have
it checked regularly as recommended in the maintenance and warranty guide.
If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop.
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the
air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.
The condensation created by the air
conditioning results in a discharge
of water under the vehicle which is
perfectly normal.
Stop & Start
The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain
a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, you can temporarily deactivate
the Stop & Start system (see the corresponding section).
Manual air conditioning
The air conditioning system operates only with the engine running.
1. Temperature adjustment
Turn the dial to select a
position between blue (cold)
and red (hot) so as to adjust
the temperature to your
requirements.
2. Air fl ow adjustment
This dial is used to increase or
decrease the speed of the air
booster fan.
3. Air distribution adjustment
This dial is used to arrange the distribution of
air in the passenger compartment by combining
several air outlets.
If you place the air flow control
in position 0 , the system is
deactivated. However, a slight flow
of air, due to the movement of the
vehicle, can still be felt.
Turn the dial from position 1 to position 5 to
obtain a comfortable air flow.
Windscreen and side windows.
Windscreen, side windows and
footwells.
Footwells.
Central and side vents.
The air distribution can be
adapted by placing the dial in an
intermediate position.
Avoid driving too long with the
ventilation off (risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality).
81
Comfort
4. Air intake / Air recirculation
The intake of exterior air prevents the formation
of mist on the windscreen and side windows.
Press the button to recirculate
the interior air. The indicator
lamp comes on to confirm this.
This function allows hot or cold air to be
delivered selectively and more quickly.
5. Air conditioning On/Off
The air conditioning is designed to
operate effectively in all seasons,
with the windows closed.
Switching on
Press the "A/C" button, the button's
indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate
when the air flow adjustment control 2
is in position " 0 ".
To obtain cooled air more quickly, you
can use recirculation of interior air for
a few moments. Then return to fresh
air intake.
The recirculation of interior air isolates the
passenger compartment from exterior odours
and smoke.
Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible
to prevent deterioration of the the air quality
and the formation of mist.
Press the button again to permit the intake
of exterior air. The indicator lamp goes off
to confirm this.
It enables you to:
- lower the temperature, in summer,
- increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3 °C.
Switching off
Press the "A/C" button again, the button's
indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off may affect comfort levels
(humidity, condensation).
Dual-zone digital air conditioning
The air conditioning system operates when the engine is running.
Automatic operation
1. Automatic comfort programme
We recommend the use of one of
the three AUTO modes available:
they provide optimised regulation of
the temperature in the passenger
compartment according to the comfort value
that you have chosen.
These three modes automatically adjust the
air flow, according to the desired setting, while
also maintaining the desired comfort value.
Press the "AUTO" button repeatedly:
- a first indicator lamp comes on; the
"light" setting mode is selected,
- a second indicator lamp comes on; the
"medium" setting mode is selected,
- a third indicator lamp comes on; the
"intense" mode setting is selected.
When the engine is cold, the air
flow will reach its optimum level
progressively, taking account of the
weather and the desired comfort level
so as to avoid too great a distribution
of cold air.
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort value, there is no
need to change the value displayed in
order to obtain the comfort required.
The system corrects the difference
in temperature automatically and as
quickly as possible.
This system is designed to operate effectively
in all seasons, with the windows closed.
83
Comfort
2. Driver's side adjustment 4. Automatic visibility
programme
For maximum cooling or heating of the
passenger compartment, it is possible
to exceed the minimum value 14 or the
maximum value 28.
Turn control 2 or 3 to the left until
"LO" is displayed or to the right
until "HI" is displayed.
See "Front demisting - defrosting".
3. Passenger's side adjustment
The driver and front passenger can
each adjust the temperature to their
requirements.
The value indicated on the display
corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a
temperature in degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit.
Turn control 2 or 3 to the left or to the right
respectively to decrease or increase this
value.
A setting around the value 21 provides
optimum comfort. However, depending on your
requirements, a setting between 18 and 24 is
normal.
You are advised to avoid a left / right setting
difference of more than 3.
Manual operation
If you wish, you can make a different choice
from that offered by the system by changing
a setting. The the "AUTO" indicator lamps go
off; the other functions will still be controlled
automatically.
Pressing the "AUTO" button returns the
system to completely automatic operation.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
5. Air conditioning On / Off
Press this button to switch off
the air conditioning.
Switching the system off could result in
discomfort (humidity, condensation).
Press this button again to return to
automatic operation of the air conditioning.
The indicator lamp on the "A/C" button
comes on.
6. Air distribution adjustment
Press one or more buttons to
direct the air flow towards:
- the windscreen and side windows
(demisting or defrosting),
- the outer and centre air vents,
- the footwells.
You can combine the three orientations to
obtain the desired air distribution.
7. Air fl ow adjustment
Turn this control to the left to
decrease the air flow or to the
right to increase the air flow.
8. Air intake / Air recirculation
Press this button for
recirculation of the interior
air. The indicator lamp in the
button comes on.
The air flow indicator lamps, between the two
fans, come on progressively in relation to the
value requested.
9. "REST" function: ventilation
with the engine off
Even with the engine is off, you can
operate the ventilation for a few
minutes.
Air recirculation enables the passenger
compartment to be isolated from exterior
odours and smoke.
As soon as possible, press this button
again to permit the intake of outside air and
prevent the formation of condensation. The
indicator lamp in the button goes off.
For example, while you are away from the
vehicle, the passengers can still enjoy some air
circulation without having the engine running.
This function is available after switching on the
ignition, as well as after stopping the engine.
The period that the function is available
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
You can activate the "REST" function while the
air conditioning control screens are on.
Avoid prolonged operation in interior air
recirculation mode (risk of misting and
deterioration of air quality).
85
Comfort
Switching the system off
Turn the air flow control to the
left until all of the indicator
lamps go off.
This switch does not operate the air conditioning, only the air fan.
When the "REST" function is activated, you cannot modify the temperature, air flow
and distribution settings: these are controlled automatically according to the ambient
temperature.
This function is not available in the STOP mode of Stop & Start.
Avoid prolonged operation in interior
air recirculation mode or driving for
long periods with the system off (risk of
misting and deterioration of air quality).
On switching on the engine
- The control screens come on: the function
is available.
- Pressing the REST button activates the
ventilation for a few minutes. Activation of
the function is confirmed by the display of
two dashes in the control screens and four
air flow level indicator lamps.
- The function can be deactivated and
reactivated if the control screens are on.
- The screens go off at the end of this
period.
On stopping the engine
- While the control screens remain on: the
function is available.
- Pressing the REST button activates the
ventilation for a few minutes. Activation of
the function is confirmed by the display of
two dashes in the control screens and four
air flow level indicator lamps.
Locking the vehicle has no effect on this
function.
- The control screens go off at the end of this
period.
Pressing again before the end of the period
interrupts off the ventilation definitively: the
control screens go off and the function is
no longer available.
This action switches off the air conditioning and
the ventilation.
Temperature related comfort is no longer
assured but a slight flow of air, due to the
movement of the vehicle, can still be felt.
Modify the settings (temperature, air flow
or air distribution) or press the "AUTO"
button to reactivate the system with the
values set before it was switched off.
Front demist - defrost
These markings on the control panel indicate the control positions for rapid demisting or
defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.
With manual air
conditioning
Put the temperature, air flow and
distribution controls to the dedicated
marked position.
Put the air intake control to the "Exterior air
intake" position
(indicator lamp on the control off).
Switch on the air conditioning by pressing
the "A/C" button; the warning lamp in the
button comes on.
With digital dual-zone air
conditioning
With Stop & Start, when the demisting,
air conditioning and air flow functions
are activated, STOP mode is not
available.
Automatic visibility programme
Select this programme to demist or defrost
the windscreen and side windows as
quickly as possible.
The system automatically manages the air
conditioning, air flow and air intake, and
provides optimum distribution towards the
windscreen and side windows.
To stop the programme, press either the
"visibility" button again or "AUTO" , the
warning lamp on the button goes off and
the warning lamp on the "AUTO" button
comes on.
The system starts again with the values in
use before it was overridden by the visibility
programme.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, the STOP mode is not
available.
87
Comfort
Rear screen demist - defrost
The control button is located on the air conditioning system control panel.
Switching on
The rear screen demisting/defrosting can only
operate when the engine is running.
Press this button to demist/defrost the
rear screen and (depending on version)
the door mirrors. The indicator lamp
associated with the button comes on.
Switching off
The demisting/defrosting switches off
automatically to prevent an excessive
consumption of current.
It is possible to stop the demisting/
defrosting operation before it is switched
off automatically by pressing the button
again. The indicator lamp associated with
the button goes off.
Switch off the demisting/defrosting
of the rear screen and door mirrors
as soon as appropriate, as lower
current consumption results in
reduced fuel consumption.
Front seats
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat back and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to
adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
Manual adjustments
Forwards-backwards
Raise the control and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
Driver's or passenger's seat
height
Pull the control upwards to raise or push
it downwards to lower, as many times as
necessary, to obtain the position required.
Seat backrest angle
Turn the control knob to adjust the seat
backrest angle.
As a safety measure, seat adjustments
should only be done when stationary.
89
Comfort
Front seats
Seat consisting of a seat cushion, a seat backrest and a head restraint which can all be adjusted to
adapt your position for ease of driving and comfort.
Driver's seat electric adjustments
Forwards-backwards
Push the control forwards or rearwards to
slide the seat.
Cushion height and angle
Tilt the rear part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required height.
Tilt the front part of the control upwards or
downwards to obtain the required angle.
Seat backrest angle
Tilt the control forwards or rearwards to
adjust the angle of the seat backrest.
The electrical functions of the driver's seat
are deactivated approximately one minute
after the ignition is switched off.
To reactivate them, switch on the ignition.
Heated seats control
With the engine running, the front seats can be
heated separately.
Use the adjustment dial, placed on the side
of each front seat, to switch on and select
the level of heating required:
0: Off.
1 : Low.
2 : Medium.
3 : High.
Additional adjustments
Head restraint height and angle
To raise a head restraint, pull it upwards.
To lower the head restraint, press the lug A
and the head restraint at the same time.
To adjust the angle of the head restraint, tilt
its lower part forwards or rearwards.
The head restraint is fitted with a frame
with notches which prevents it from
lowering; this is a safety device in case
of impact.
The adjustment is correct when the
upper edge of the head restraint is
level with the top of the head.
Removing a head restraint
To remove the head restraint, press the
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards.
To put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in the
openings keeping them in line with the seat
back and press the lug A at the same time.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
adjusted correctly.
91
Comfort
Manual lumbar adjustment
Turn the knob to obtain the desired level of
lumbar support.
Electric lumbar adjustment
Press the front or rear of the control to
obtain the desired lumbar support.
This function provides a back massage; it only
operates when the engine is running.
Press the switch to activate the function.
The warning lamp on the switch comes on and
the massage function is activated for a period
of 60 minutes. During this time, massage is
performed in 6 cycles of 10 minutes each cycle
(6 minutes of massage followed by 4 minutes
break).
After an hour, the function is automatically
deactivated. The warning lamp in the switch
goes off.
Deactivation
You can deactivate the massage function at
any time by pressing the switch. The movement
in progress continues until the initial non-
massage position is reached.
Massage function
Rear seats
Bench seat with fixed one-piece cushion and split backrest (left hand 2/3, right hand 1/3) which can be folded individually to adapt the load space in the boot.
Move the corresponding front seat forward
if necessary.
Position the seat belt between the outer
and centre head restraints to avoid
trapping the belt when repositioning the
seat backrest.
Place the head restraints in the low
position.
Folding the backrest
Pull control 1 forwards to release the seat
back 2 .
Fold the seat back 2 on to the cushion.
Straighten the seat back 2 and secure it.
Check that the red indicator, located next
to the control 1 , is no longer visible.
Put the seat belt back in place on the side
of the seat backrest.
Repositioning the seat backrest
When repositioning the seat backrest,
take care not to trap the seat belts.
93
Comfort
These have one position for use (up) and a
stowed position (down).
They can also be removed.
To remove a head restraint:
release the backrest using control 1 ,
tilt the backrest 2 slightly forwards,
pull the head restraint upwards to the stop,
then, press the lug A .
Rear head restraints
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
correctly adjusted.
Steering wheel adjustment
When stationary , pull the control lever to
release the adjustment mechanism.
Adjust the height and reach to suit your
driving position.
Push the control lever to lock the
adjustment mechanism.
As a safety precaution, these
operations should only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
Mirrors
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass
permitting the lateral rearward vision necessary
for overtaking or parking. They can also be
folded for parking in confined spaces.
Demisting - Defrosting
Adjustment
Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror.
Move control B in all four directions to
adjust.
Return control A to the central position.
Door mirrors
The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of vehicles
approaching from behind.
Folding
From outside: lock the vehicle using
the remote control or the key.
From inside: with the ignition on, pull the
control A in the central position rearwards.
Unfolding
From outside: unlock the vehicle using
the remote control or the key.
From inside: with the ignition on, pull the
control A in the central position rearwards.
If the mirrors are folded using control A ,
they will not unfold when the vehicle is
unlocked. Pull again on control A .
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Never fold or unfold the electric folding
mirrors manually.
If your vehicle is fitted with heated
mirrors, the demisting-defrosting
operates by switching on the heated
rear screen (refer to the "Rear screen
demist-defrost" page).
The rear screen demist - defrost can only
operate when the engine is running.
95
Comfort
Automatic tilting in reverse gear
System which provides a view of the ground
during parking manoeuvres in reverse gear.
Programming
With the engine running, engage reverse
gear.
Select and adjust the left-hand and right-
hand mirrors in succession.
The adjustment is stored immediately.
Switching on
With the engine running, engage reverse
gear.
Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror.
The glass of the mirror selected tilts
downwards, in accordance with its
programming.
Switching off
Exit reverse gear and wait ten seconds.
or
Return control A to the central position.
The mirror glass returns to its initial position.
The mirror glass also returns to its initial
position:
- if the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),
- if the engine is switched off.
Rear view mirror
Adjustable mirror providing a central rearward view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to
the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...
Manual day/night model
Adjustment
Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Day/night position
Pull the lever to change to the "night"
anti-dazzle position.
Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
By means of a sensor, which measures the
light from the rear of the vehicle, this system
automatically and progressively changes
between the day and night uses.
Automatic day/night model
In order to ensure optimum visibility
during your manoeuvres, the mirror
lightens automatically when reverse
gear is engaged.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the "blind spot".
97
Comfort
004
Access
Remote control key
System which permits central unlocking or locking of the vehicle using the door lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle,
as well as providing protection against theft.
Unlocking the vehicle
Unfolding the key
Press this button to unfold the key.
Complete unlocking using the
remote control
Selective unlocking using the
remote control
Press the open padlock to unlock
the vehicle completely.
Press the open padlock once to
unlock the driver's door only.
Press the open padlock again to unlock the
other doors and the boot.
Opening the windows using the
remote control
Maintain the press on the open
padlock until the desired position
is obtained. The windows stop as
soon as you release the button.
Programming the unlocking
The complete or selective door
unlocking parameter is set via the
vehicle configuration menu.
101
Access
Unlocking using the key
Turn the key forwards in the driver's door
lock to unlock the vehicle completely.
Selective unlocking of the boot
Press the central button on the
remote control to unlock the
boot. The doors remain locked.
If selective unlocking of the boot is deactivated,
pressing this button also unlocks the doors.
Programming the unlocking
The complete or selective boot
unlocking parameter is set via the
vehicle configuration menu.
Selective unlocking of the boot is
activated by default.
Don't forget to lock the boot again by
pressing the closed padlock button.
The direction indicators flash for a few
seconds.
The spotlamps in the door mirrors
come on.
Depending on version, the door mirrors
unfold, the welcome lighting comes on,
the alarm is deactivated.
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking using the remote
control
Normal locking using the key
Turn the key towards the rear in the driver's
door lock to lock the vehicle.
Press the closed padlock to lock
the vehicle.
If one of the doors or the boot is still
open, the central locking does not take
place.
However, the alarm (if present) will be
completely activated after about
45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
and with no action on the doors or
boot, the vehicle will lock itself again
automatically after about 30 seconds.
If the alarm had previously been
activated, it will not be reactivated
automatically.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can be
deactivated by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The direction indicators flash for a few
seconds.
Depending on version, the door mirrors fold,
the alarm is activated.
103
Access
Closing the windows using the
remote control
Press and hold down the closed
padlock until the desired position
is obtained. The windows stop
when you release the button.
When closing the windows using the
remote control you must ensure that
nothing prevents them from closing
correctly.
If you want to leave the windows
partly open, you must deactivate the
volumetric alarm monitoring.
Deadlocking using the remote
control
Press the closed padlock to lock
the vehicle completely.
Press the closed padlock again
within five seconds to deadlock
the vehicle.
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the central locking
control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone inside
the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Deadlocking using the key
Turn the key to the rear in the driver's door
lock to lock the vehicle completely.
Turn the key to the rear again within
five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting
of the direction indicators for approximately
two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors fold at
the same time.
In low light, deadlocking also brings on the
guide-me-home lighting (see "Visibility").
Press the closed padlock on the remote
control.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and the
direction indicators will flash for around ten
seconds.
Locating your vehicle
This function allows you to identify
your vehicle from a distance,
particularly in poor light. Your vehicle
must be locked.
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip which has
a special code. When the ignition is switched
on, this code must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser locks the
engine management system a few minutes
after the ignition is switched off and prevents
starting of the engine by anyone who does not
have the key.
In the event of a fault, you are
informed by illumination of this
warning lamp, an audible signal
and a message in the screen.
In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact
a CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
Folding the key
First press this button to fold the key.
If you do not press the button when
folding the key, there is a risk of
damage to the mechanism.
Keep safely, away from your vehicle,
the label attached to the keys given to
you on acquisition of the vehicle.
105
Access
Starting the vehicle
Insert the key in the ignition switch.
The system recognises the starting code.
Turn the key fully towards the dashboard to
position 3 (Starting) .
When the engine starts, release the key.
Immobilise the vehicle.
Turn the key fully towards you to
position 1 (Stop) .
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Switching the vehicle off
A heavy object (key fob...), attached to
the key and weighing down on its shaft
in the ignition switch, could cause a
malfunction.
Key left in the "Ignition on"
position
On opening the driver's door, an alert
message is displayed, accompanied
by an audible signal, to remind you that
the key is still in the ignition switch at
position 1 (Stop) .
If the key has been left in the ignition
switch at position 2 (Ignition on) ,
the ignition will be switched off
automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the
key to position 1 (Stop) , then back to
position 2 (Ignition on) .
In the event of a malfunction with the remote
control, you can no longer unlock, lock or
locate your vehicle.
First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle.
Then, reinitialise the remote control.
Fault with the remote
control
Reinitialisation
Switch off the ignition and remove the
ignition key.
Press the closed padlock immediately for a
few seconds.
Turn the key to position 2 (Ignition on) .
Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.
Changing the battery
Battery ref.: CR2032/3 volts.
Unclip the cover using a small screwdriver
at the two cutouts.
Lift off the cover.
Remove the flat battery from its location.
Fit the new battery into its location
observing the original direction of fitment.
Clip the cover onto the casing.
If the battery is flat, you are
informed by illumination of this
warning lamp, an audible signal
and a message in the screen.
If the problem persists, contact a
CITROËN dealer as soon as possible.
107
Access
Do not throw the remote control
batteries away, they contain metals
which are harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
Lost keys
Go to a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's registration document, your personal
identification documents and if possible the key code label.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to look up the key code and the transponder code
required to order a new key.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your
pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of
your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have
to be reinitialised.
No remote control can operate when the key is in the ignition switch, even when the ignition
is switched off, except for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the
emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution, never leave children alone in the vehicle, except for a very short
period.
In all cases, it is essential to remove the key from the ignition switch when leaving the vehicle.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could
cause malfunctions.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the pairing of all of the keys in your possession checked by a CITROËN dealer, to
ensure that only your keys can be used to open and start the vehicle.
Locking
Press this button to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Central locking control
This control allows the simultaneous locking or unlocking of the doors and boot from inside the
vehicle.
If one of the doors is open, central
locking from the inside does not take
place.
Unlocking
Press the button again to unlock the
vehicle.
The red indicator lamp in the button goes off.
When locking / deadlocking
from the outside
When the vehicle is locked or
deadlocked from the outside, the red
warning lamp flashes and the button is
inoperative.
With normal locking, pull the
interior door control lever to unlock
the vehicle.
With deadlocking, you have to use
the remote control or the key to
unlock the vehicle.
109
Access
This system allows automatic simultaneous locking of the doors and boot as soon as the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
Anti-intrusion security
Operation
Activation / Deactivation
You can activate or deactivate this function
permanently.
With the ignition on, press this button
until an audible signal starts and a
corresponding message is displayed.
If one of the doors or the boot is open, the
automatic central locking does not take place.
This is signalled by the sound of
the locks rebounding, accompanied
by illumination of this symbol in the
instrument panel, an audible signal
and the display of an alert message.
Carrying long and voluminous
objects
If you want to drive with the boot open,
you should press the central locking
button to lock the the doors. Otherwise,
every time the speed of the vehicle
exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the locks
will rebound and the alerts mentioned
above will appear.
Pressing the central locking button unlocks the
vehicle.
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), this locking is
temporary.
The state of the system stays in memory when
switching off the ignition.
Alarm *
System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. It provides the following types of monitoring.
- exterior perimeter
The system checks for opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a
door, the boot, the bonnet...
- interior volumetric
The system checks for any variation in the
volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
window, enters the passenger compartment or
moves inside the vehicle.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
- tilt
The system checks for any change in the
attitude of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted,
moved or knocked.
Self-protection function
The system checks for the putting out of
service of its components.
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central
control or the siren wiring are put out of service
or damaged.
For all work on the alarm system,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Activation
Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle.
Press the locking button on the remote control.
The monitoring system is active: the indicator
lamp in the button flashes once per second.
After the locking button on the remote control
is pressed, the exterior perimeter monitoring
is activated after a delay of 5 seconds and the
interior volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring after
a delay of 45 seconds.
Deactivation
Press the unlocking button on the remote
control.
The alarm system is deactivated: the indicator
lamp in the button goes off.
If an opening (door, boot...) is not
closed fully, the vehicle is not locked
but the exterior perimeter monitoring
will be activated after a delay of
45 seconds at the same time as
the interior volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring.
* According to country.
111
Access
Deactivate the interior volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring to avoid unwanted triggering of the
alarm in certain cases such as:
- leaving a pet in the vehicle,
- leaving a window partially open,
- washing your vehicle,
- changing a wheel,
- having your vehicle towed,
- transport by sea.
Locking the vehicle
with exterior perimeter
monitoring only
Deactivation of the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring
Switch off the ignition.
Within ten seconds, press the button until
the indicator lamp is on continuously.
Get out of the vehicle.
Press the locking button on the remote
control immediately.
The exterior perimeter monitoring alone is
activated: the indicator lamp in the button
flashes once per second.
To be effective, this deactivation must
be carried out each time the ignition is
switched off.
Reactivation of the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt
monitoring
Press the unlocking button on the remote
control to deactivate the exterior perimeter
monitoring.
Press the locking button on the remote
control to activate all the monitoring
functions.
The indicator lamp in the button again flashes
once per second.
Triggering of the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and
flashing of the direction indicators for
thirty seconds.
The monitoring functions remain active until
the alarm has been triggered eleven times in
succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp
in the button informs you that the alarm was
triggered during your absence. When the
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops
immediately.
Failure of the remote control
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock.
unlock the vehicle using the key in the
driver's door lock,
open the door; the alarm is triggered,
switch on the ignition; the alarm stops;
the indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Operating fault
When the ignition is switched on, fixed
illumination of the indicator lamp in the button
indicates a fault with the system.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
113
Access
Doors
Opening
From outside
After unlocking the vehicle completely
using the remote control or the key, pull the
door handle.
From inside
Pull the interior control lever of a front door;
this unlocks the vehicle completely.
Closing
When a door is not closed correctly:
- when the engine is running ,
this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an alert
message for a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving (speed
higher than 6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning
lamp comes on, accompanied by an alert
message for a few seconds.
When the selective unlocking is
activated, the first press of the remote
control unlocking button permits
unlocking of the driver's door only.
With the selective unlocking activated:
- opening the driver's door unlocks
the driver's door only (if the vehicle
has not already been completely
unlocked).
- opening the passenger's door
unlocks the rest of the vehicle.
The interior door controls do
not operate when the vehicle is
deadlocked.
System allowing the doors to be locked and
unlocked manually in the event of a malfunction
of the central locking system or battery failure.
Emergency control
Locking the driver's door
Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the rear.
You can also apply the procedure described for
the passenger doors.
Unlocking the driver's door
Insert the key in the door lock, then turn it
to the front.
Locking the front and rear
passenger doors
Open the doors.
On the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on (see the corresponding section).
Remove the black cap, located on the edge
of the door, using the key.
Insert the key in the socket without forcing
it, then without turning it, move the latch
sideways towards the inside of the door.
Remove the key and refit the cap.
Close the doors and check that the vehicle
has locked correctly from the outside.
Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors
Pull the interior door opening control.
115
Access
Boot
System allowing the mechanical unlocking
of the boot in the event of a battery or central
locking system malfunction.
Tailgate release
Unlocking
Fold back the rear seats to gain access to
the lock from inside the boot.
Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock to unlock the tailgate.
Move the latch to the left.
After unlocking the boot or the vehicle
using the remote control or the key, press
the opening control, then raise the tailgate.
Opening Closing
Lower the tailgate using the interior grab
handle.
If necessary, press down on the tailgate to
fully close it.
- when the engine is running ,
this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by the display of an
alert message for a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving (speed above
6 mph (10 km/h)), this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an audible signal and
the display of an alert message for a
few seconds.
Locking after closing
If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
will remain locked.
If the tailgate is not closed correctly:
1. Driver's electric window control.
2. Passenger's electric window control.
- manual mode
Press or pull the control gently.
The window stops when the control is
released.
- automatic mode
Press or pull the control firmly.
The window opens or closes fully when
the control is released.
Pressing the control again stops the
movement of the window.
The electric window controls remain
operational for approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is
switched off or until the vehicle is
locked after a door is opened.
If the passenger 's window cannot be
operated from the driver's door control
panel, carry out the operation from the
passenger's door control panel,
and vice versa.
Electric windows
Fitted with a safety anti-pinch system.
One-touch electric
windows
There are two options:
After approximately ten consecutive
complete opening/closing movements
of the window, a protection function is
activated which only authorises closing
of the window to prevent damage to the
electric window motor.
Once the window is closed, the controls
will become available again after
approximately 40 minutes.
117
Access
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets an obstacle,
it stops and partially lowers again.
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automatically,
its operation must be reinitialised:
pull the control until the window stops,
release the control and pull it again until
the window closes fully,
continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the
window has closed,
press the control to lower the window
automatically to the low position,
when the window has reached the low
position, press the control again for
approximately one second.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
If the window cannot be closed
(for example, in the presence of ice),
once the window has lowered:
press and hold the control until the
window opens fully,
then pull the control immediately
and hold it until the window closes,
continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after the
window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows,
you must reverse the movement of the
window. To do this, press the control
concerned.
When the driver operates the
passenger's electric window control,
they must ensure that nothing is
preventing the windows closing
correctly.
The driver must ensure that the
passengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the windows.
Fuel tank
Capacity of the tank: approximately 60 litres.
Low fuel level
When the low fuel level in the
tank is reached, this warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible warning
and the display of an alert message. When it
first comes on, around 6 litres of fuel remain
in the tank.
Until sufficient fuel has been added, every
time the ignition is switched on, this warning
lamp appears, accompanied by an audible
signal and an alert message. When driving,
this audible signal and the display of this
alert message are repeated with increasing
frequency, as the level drops towards 0 .
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid
running out.
If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer also to
"Checks".
Refuelling
Press control A until the automatic opening
of the fuel flap is heard.
This control remains active for a few
minutes after switching off the ignition.
If necessary, switch the ignition on again
to reactivate it.
Take care to select the pump that delivers
the correct fuel for your vehicle.
With Stop & Start, never refuel with the
system in STOP mode; you must switch
off the ignition with the key.
Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres to
be registered by the fuel gauge.
Opening the filler cap may result in an inrush of
air. This vacuum is entirely normal and results
from the sealing of the fuel system.
119
Access
If you are filling your tank to the top, do not
persist after the third cut-off; this could
cause your vehicle to malfunction.
The petrol or Diesel engine of your vehicle is
fitted with a catalytic converter, a device which
helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions
in the exhaust gases.
For petrol engines, the use of unleaded fuel
is compulsory.
The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded
petrol nozzles only.
Fuel supply cut-off
If you have put in the wrong fuel for
your vehicle, you must have the tank
drained and refilled with the correct
fuel before you start the engine.
Introduce the nozzle so as to push in the
metal non-return flap B.
Make sure that the nozzle is pushed in as
far as possible before starting to refuel
(risk of blowback).
Maintain this position while refuelling.
Push the fuel flap to close it.
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device
which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a
collision.
Quality of the fuel used for
petrol engines
The petrol engines are perfectly compatible
with E10 or E24 type petrol biofuels (containing
10 % or 24 % ethanol), conforming to European
standards EN 228 and EN 15376.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 % ethanol)
are reserved exclusively for vehicles marketed
for the use of this type of fuel (BioFlex
vehicles). The quality of the ethanol must
comply with European standard EN 15293.
For Brazil only, special vehicles are marketed
to run on fuels containing up to 100 % ethanol
(E100 type).
Quality of the fuel used for
Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are perfectly compatible
with biofuels which conform to current and
future European standards (Diesel fuel
which complies with standard EN 590 mixed
with a biofuel which complies with standard
EN 14214) available at the pumps (containing
up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The B30 biofuel can be used in certain Diesel
engines; however, this use is subject to strict
application of the special servicing conditions.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio)fuel
(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted,
domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of
damage to the engine and fuel system).
121
Access
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be
different in other countries, the presence
of the misfuel prevention device may
make refuelling impossible.
Before travelling abroad, we
recommend that you check with the
CITROËN dealer network, whether your
vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in
the country in which you want to travel.
Misfuel prevention (Diesel) *
Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of
engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel.
Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the
fuel filler neck of your Diesel vehicle, it comes
into contact with the flap. The system remains
closed and prevents filling.
Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type
filler nozzle.
Operation
It remains possible to use a fuel can to
fill the tank.
In order to ensure a good flow of fuel,
do not place the nozzle of the fuel can
in direct contact with the flap of the
misfuel prevention device and pour
slowly.
* According to country of sale.
005
Visibility
Lighting controls
System for selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting.
The various front and rear lamps of the vehicle
are designed to adapt the driver's visibility
progressively according to the climatic
conditions:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see clearly when
the road is clear.
Main lighting
Other lamps are provided to meet the
requirements of particular driving conditions:
- rear foglamps,
- front foglamps with cornering lighting,
- directional headlamps for improved
visibility when cornering,
- daytime running lamps to be more visible
during the day,
- guide-me-home and welcome lighting to
facilitate access to the vehicle,
- parking lamps as vehicle position markers.
Additional lighting
The setting of some functions can be adjusted:
- daytime running lamps,
- automatic illumination of headlamps,
- guide-me-home lighting,
- welcome lighting,
- directional lighting.
Programming
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), the presence
of misting on the internal surface of the
glass of the headlamps and rear lamps
is normal; it disappears after the lamps
have been on for a few minutes.
125
Visibility
Model without AUTO lighting
Model with AUTO lighting
Manual controls
The lighting is controlled directly by the driver
by means of the ring A and the stalk B .
Sidelamps (lighting signature).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
B. Stalk for switching headlamps: pull the stalk
towards you to switch the lighting between
dipped and main beam headlamps.
In the lamps off and sidelamps modes, the
driver can switch on the main beam headlamps
temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
A. Main lighting mode selection ring: turn it
to position the symbol required facing the
mark.
Lighting off / daytime running lamps.
Sidelamps.
Dipped headlamps or main beam headlamps.
Displays
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp in the instrument panel confirms that the
lighting selected is on.
Daytime lighting, compulsory in certain
countries, which comes on automatically when
the engine is started making the vehicle more
visible to other users.
This function is assured:
- in countries where it is imposed by
regulations,
by illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps associated with illumination of
the sidelamps and number plate lamps; this
function cannot be deactivated.
- for other countries where it is provided,
by illumination of dedicated lamps; this
function can be activated or deactivated via
the vehicle configuration menu.
Daytime running lamps
The lighting control must be in position "0" or
"AUTO" (day mode).
C. Foglamp selection ring.
The foglamps operate with the dipped and main
beam headlamps.
Rotate and release the ring C :
forwards a first time to switch on the front
foglamps ,
forwards a second time to switch on the
rear foglamps,
rearwards a first time to switch off the rear
foglamps,
rearwards a second time to switch off the
front foglamps.
Model with front and rear
foglamps
In good or rainy weather, by both day
and night, the front foglamps and the
rear foglamps are prohibited. In these
situations, the power of their beams
may dazzle other drivers. They should
only be used in fog or falling snow.
In these weather conditions, you should
switch on the foglamps and dipped
beam headlamps manually, as the
sunshine sensor may detect sufficient
light.
Do not forget to switch off the front and
rear foglamps when they are no longer
necessary.
front and rear foglamps
When the headlamps switch off with automatic
illumination of headlamps (AUTO model)
or when the dipped beam headlamps are
switched off manually, the foglamps and
sidelamps remain on.
Turn the ring rearwards to switch off the
foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.
127
Visibility
Switching off the lighting
when switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, all
of the lamps switch off immediately,
except for the dipped beam headlamps
if automatic guide-me-home lighting is
activated.
The temporary illumination of the dipped beam
headlamps after the vehicle's ignition has been
switched off makes the driver's exit easier
when the light is poor.
Switching on
With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting stalk.
A further "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting switches
off automatically after a set time.
Manual guide-me-home
lighting
Switching on the lighting when
switching on the ignition
To reactivate the lighting control stalk, turn
the ring A to position "0" - lighting off, then
to the position of your choice.
If the lighting is switched on manually after
switching off the ignition, there is an audible
signal when a front door is opened to warn
the driver that they have forgotten to switch
off the vehicle's lighting, with the ignition off.
They switch off automatically after a period
which depends on the state of charge of the
battery (entry to energy economy mode).
Parking lamps
Side markers for the vehicle by illumination of
the sidelamps on the traffic side only.
Within one minute of switching off the
ignition, operate the lighting control stalk
up or down depending on the traffic side
(for example: when parking on the left;
lighting control stalk upwards; the right
hand sidelamps are on).
This is confirmed by an audible signal and
illumination of the corresponding direction
indicator warning lamp in the instrument panel.
To switch off the parking lamps, return the
lighting control stalk to the central position.
When a low level of ambient light is detected
by a sunshine sensor, the number plate
lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps
are switched on automatically, without any
action on the part of the driver. They can also
come on if rain is detected, at the same time as
automatic operation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a
sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps
Activation
Turn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The
activation of the function is accompanied
by the display of a message in the screen.
Deactivation
Turn the ring to another position.
Deactivation of the function is accompanied
by the display of a message in the screen.
Automatic "guide-me-
home" lighting
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of
the sunshine sensor, the lighting
comes on, this warning lamp is
displayed in the instrument panel and/or a
message appears in the screen, accompanied
by an audible signal.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor
may detect sufficient light. In this
case, the lighting will not come on
automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sensor,
coupled with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror; the
associated functions would no longer
be controlled.
When the automatic illumination of headlamps
function is activated, under low ambient
light the dipped beams headlamps come on
automatically when the ignition is switched off.
Programming
Activation or deactivation, as well
as the duration of the guide-me-
home lighting, is set in the vehicle
configuration menu.
129
Visibility
Welcome lighting
The remote switching on of the passenger compartment lighting makes your access to the vehicle
easier in poor light. It is activated depending on the light level detected by the sunshine sensor.
Switching on
Switching off
On the outside, the welcome lighting switches
off automatically after a set time, when the
ignition is switched on or on locking the vehicle.
On the inside, the welcome lighting switches off
automatically after a pre-determined time or on
opening one of the doors.
Press the open padlock on the
remote control; your vehicle is
unlocked.
On the outside, the sidelamps and dipped
beam headlamps, as well as the side
spotlamps, located under the door mirrors,
come on.
On the inside, the footwell and courtesy lamps
come on.
Activation or deactivation, as well as
the duration of the lighting duration
for the exterior welcome lighting can
be set via the vehicle configuration
menu.
Programming
Automatic adjustment of xenon headlamps
Do not touch the xenon bulbs.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This system adjusts the height of the xenon
headlamp beams automatically and when
stationary, according to the load in the vehicle, so
as to avoid causing a nuisance to other road user.
If a malfunction occurs, this
warning lamp is displayed in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message in the screen.
The system then places your headlamps in the
lowest position.
Manual adjustment
of halogen
headlamps
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road
users, the height of the halogen headlamps
should be adjusted according to the load in the
vehicle.
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised load.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised load.
The initial setting is position "0" .
131
Visibility
Directional lighting
When the dipped or main beam headlamps
are on, this function, allows the light beams to
better follow the road.
The use of this function, coupled with the
xenon headlamps and the cornering lighting,
considerably improves the quality of your
lighting round bends.
This function is inactive:
- when stationary or at low speeds,
- when reverse is engaged.
The system is activated by default. with directional lighting
without directional lighting
Programming
The system is activated or
deactivated in the vehicle
configuration menu.
The state of the system stays in memory on
switching off the ignition.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Operating fault
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp
flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message in the
screen.
Cornering lighting
With dipped or main beams, this function
makes use of the beam from a front foglamp
to illuminate the inside of a bend, when the
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (approximately
40 km/h) (urban driving, winding road,
intersections, parking manouevres...).
Switching on
with cornering lighting
without cornering lighting
Switching off
The system does not operate:
- below a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel,
- above 25 mph (40 km/h),
- when reverse gear is engaged.
The system is activated by default.
Programming
The system is activated or
deactivated in the vehicle
configuration menu.
This function starts:
- when the corresponding direction indicator
is switched on,
or
- from a certain angle of rotation of the
steering wheel.
133
Visibility
System for selection and control of the various
front and rear wiping modes for the elimination
of rain and cleaning the screens.
The vehicle's front and rear wipers are
designed to improve the driver's visibility
according to the climatic conditions.
The wipers are controlled by means of stalk A
for the front and the ring B for the rear.
Wiper controls
Programming
Model without AUTO wiping
Various automatic wiper control modes are also
available depending on whether the following
options are fitted:
- automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
Model with AUTO wiping
Windscreen wiper
A. Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower
the stalk to the desired position.
Single wipe (press downwards or pull
the stalk briefly towards you, then
release).
Automatic wiping (press down,
then release).
Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly
towards you).
Fast wiping (heavy rain).
Normal wiping (moderate rain).
Intermittent wiping (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle).
Park.
or
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically,
without any action on the part of the driver,
if rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view
mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of
the rainfall.
Switching on
Briefly push stalk A downwards.
The instruction is confirmed by
a wiping cycle, accompanied by
illumination of this warning lamp
in the instrument panel and an
activation message.
Switching off
Briefly push stalk A downwards again.
The instruction is confirmed by
this warning lamp going off in the
instrument panel and/or the display of
a deactivation message.
The automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers must be reactivated
if the ignition has been off for more
than one minute.
Operating fault
If an automatic rain sensitive wiper malfunction
occurs, the wipers will operate in intermittent
mode.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with
the sunshine sensor and located in the
centre of the windscreen behind the rear
view mirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sensitive
wipers when using an automatic car wash.
In winter, it is advisable to wait until the
windscreen is completely clear of ice
before activating the automatic rain
sensitive wipers.
135
Visibility
Windscreen and headlamp wash
Windscreen wash
Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards
you. The windscreen wash then the
windscreen wipers operate for a fixed
period.
It operates only when the headlamps are off or
the vehicle is stationary.
Low screenwash / headlamp
wash fl uid level
On vehicle fitted with headlamp washers, the
low level of this fluid is indicated by gauge in
the reservoir filler neck under the bonnet.
Checking and topping up this fluid can should
be done with the engine off.
The level of this fluid should be
checked regularly, particularly during
winter.
Refer to "Checks - Screenwash / headlamp
wash level" section for the procedure on
checking the level.
Headlamp wash
Associated with the windscreen wash, the
headlamp washers operate with the vehicle
moving, when the dipped or main beam
headlamps are on .
To reduce the consumption of the fluid
by the headlamp washers, they operate
only with every seventh use of the
screenwash or every 25 miles (40 km)
during a given journey.
To maintain the effectiveness of the
"flat-blade" type of wiper blades, it is
advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using soapy
water,
- avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen,
- replace them at the first signs of
wear.
This position permits release of the windscreen
wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement of the
blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to
detach the blades from the windscreen.
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
Any action on the wiper stalk in the minute
after switching off the ignition places the
blades vertically on the screen.
To park the blades again, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
137
Visibility
B. Rear wiper selection ring: turn the ring
to place the desired symbol against the
marking.
If a significant accumulation of snow or
ice is present, or when using a tailgate
bicycle carrier, deactivate the automatic
rear wiper via the vehicle configuration
menu.
Park.
Intermittent wipe.
Wash-wipe.
Turn the ring to its stop/the rear
screen wash, then the rear wiper
operates for a set duration.
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper
will come into operation if the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Programming
Rear wiper
The function is activated or
deactivated via the vehicle
configuration menu.
This function is activated by default.
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Front map reading lamps
3. Rear courtesy lamp
4. Rear map reading lamps
Courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy
lamp comes on gradually:
Front and rear courtesy lamps
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when the key is removed from the ignition,
- on opening a door,
- when the remote control locking button is
used to locate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
In permanent lighting mode, the
lighting time varies according to the
circumstances:
- with the ignition off, approximately
ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unlimited.
When the courtesy lamp is in the
"permanent lighting" position, the rear
courtesy lamp also comes on, except if
it is in the "permanently off" position.
To switch off the rear courtesy lamp,
put it in the the "permanently off"
position.
Front and rear map reading
lamps
With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
Take care not to put anything in contact
with the courtesy lamps.
139
Visibility
Interior mood lighting
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when
the light is poor.
At night, the audio system and digital air
conditioning illumination, together with the
illumination of the central dashboard storage
box, comes on automatically when the
sidelamps are on.
The interior mood lighting switches off
automatically when the sidelamps are
switched off.
It can be switched off manually by adjusting the
instrument panel lighting dimmer button to one
of the lowest settings.
On certain versions, three LEDs, located in the
rail linking the rear view mirror to the roof come
on as well.
Switching on Switching off
This comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and goes off automatically when the
boot is closed.
Boot lamp
The lighting time varies according to the
circumstances:
- when the ignition is off,
approximately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode,
approximately thirty seconds,
- when the engine is running, no limit.
141
Visibility
006
Fittings
Interior fi ttings
1. Sun visor
(see "Familiarisation - § Panoramic
windscreen)
2. Ticket/card holder
3. Storage compartments
4. Illuminated glove box
(see details on a following page)
5. Door pocket s
6. USB port / Auxiliary socket
(see details on a following page)
7. Cigarette lighter / 12 V accessory
socket
(see details on following pages)
8. Portable ashtray
(see details on following pages)
9. Centre armrest with storage
(see details on a following page)
145
Fittings
Illuminated glove
box
Its lid has locations for storing a pen, a pair of
glasses, tokens, maps, a cup...
To open the glove box, raise the handle.
It is lit when the lid is opened.
It houses the front passenger airbag
deactivation switch A .
If the vehicle is fitted with air conditioning, it
provides access to the ventilation nozzle B ,
distributing the same cooled air as the vents in
the passenger compartment.
It gives access to the dashboard fusebox (see
"Practical information - § Changing a fuse").
Portable ashtray
Pull the cover to open the ashtray.
To empty it, remove the ashtray by pulling it
upwards.
To avoid any problem of interference
or risk of overturning, do not place the
ashtray near the gear lever.
Cigarette lighter/12 V
accessory socket
To use the cigarette lighter, press it in
and wait a few seconds until it pops out
automatically.
To connect a 12 V accessory (max power:
120 W), remove the cigarette lighter and
connect a suitable adaptor.
You can use this socket to connect a telephone
charger, a bottle warmer...
After use, put the cigarette lighter back into
place straight away.
USB port / auxiliary
socket
Connected to the USB port, the
portable device charges automatically
while in use.
The "AUX" connection box, located in the
centre console, comprises an auxiliary JACK
socket and/or a USB port.
It permits the connection of a portable device,
such as a digital audio player of the iPod
®
or
USB memory stick type.
It reads certain audio file formats allowing them
to be heard via the vehicle's speakers.
You can manage these files using the steering
mounted controls or the audio system control
panel and display them on the multifunction
screen.
For more information on the use of this
equipment, refer to the "Audio and telematics"
section.
147
Fittings
Semi-raised centre console
1. Front armrest
(see details on following pages)
2. Open storage
3. Cup holder
4. Storage pocket
Raised centre console
1. Front armrest
(see details on following pages)
2. 12 V accessory socket
(see details on following pages)
3. Storage box
4. Cup holder/Bottle holder
5. Storage pocket
6. Large multifunctional storage unit
(see details on following pages)
Large multifunctional
storage unit
This storage unit is closed by a sliding shutter.
It contains:
- the USB port and 12 V/auxiliary sockets 1 ,
- a retractable support 2 to receive your
mobile phone or portable device,
- a space ventilated by a closeable nozzle 3 ,
to keep food and drinks fresh if the air
conditioning is operating.
It is illuminated only when the sliding
shutter is fully open.
The sliding shutter can be partly
closed up to the level of the retractable
support, so as to keep the storage unit
cool.
149
Fittings
Front armrest
Comfort and storage system for the driver and front passenger.
The height and length of the armrest cover can be adjusted.
Longitudinal adjustment Height adjustment Storage
Raise the cover to the required position
(low, intermediate or high).
If you raise the cover slightly beyond the
high position, guide it when lowering it to
the low position.
Slide the cover fully forwards or rearwards.
The storage space in the armrest can hold up
to 6 CDs.
Raise the lever.
Raise the cover fully.
Longitudinal adjustment
Front armrest
Comfort and storage device for the driver and front passenger.
The length of the armrest cover can be adjusted.
The armrest's compartment can hold up to
6 CDs.
Raise the cover fully.
Storage
To move forwards, raise the lever.
The armrest slides forwards to its stop.
To stow it, slide it fully back and press
down to lock it.
12 V accessory
socket
To connect a 12 V accessory
(max power: 120 W), lift the cover and
connect a suitable adaptor.
151
Fittings
Mats
Removable carpet protection.
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the
driver's side use only the fixings provided in
the wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on
the carpet.
Fitting Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
move the seat as far back as possible,
unclip the fixings,
remove the mat.
Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side:
position the mat correctly,
refit the fixings by pressing,
check that the mat is secured correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming of
the pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the
vehicle; these fixings must be used,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by
CITROËN may interfere with access to
the pedals and hinder the operation of
the cruise control/speed limiter.
Raise the front of the drawer and pull it open.
Storage drawers
Located under each front seat, except for the driver's seat on versions with electric seat.
On the passenger's side, the drawer holds the vehicle handbook pack.
Removal
Avoid removing the drawer completely, as
refitting it is not easy.
Open the drawer fully.
Pull the drawer upwards to disengage it.
Opening
Refitting
However, if it has been completely removed, to
refit it:
use the torch to illuminate the area under
the seat,
engage the drawer in its runners,
lift the retaining tongues and slide the
drawer under these tongues,
at the end of its travel, press down on the
drawer to engage it.
Do not place heavy objects in
the drawer.
153
Fittings
Lower the rear armrest.
Pull the flap handle downwards.
Lower the flap.
Load the objects from inside the boot.
Ski fl ap
Arrangement for storing and transporting long
objects.
Opening
Lower the rear armrest for a more
comfortable position.
This also gives access to the ski flap.
Rear armrest
Comfort system for the rear passengers.
1. Rear parcel shelf
(see details on a following page)
2. Hooks
(see details on a following page)
3. 12 V accessory socket
(see details on a following page)
4. Torch
(see details on following pages)
5. Lashing rings
6. Storage box
(see details on following pages)
7. Retaining strap
8. Storage net
Boot fi ttings
155
Fittings
To remove the shelf:
unhook the two cords,
raise the shelf slightly, then remove it.
There are several options for storing the shelf:
- either upright behind the front seats,
- or flat at the base of the boot.
Rear parcel shelf
The hooks can be used to secure shopping
bags.
Hooks
Access to the storage box
An additional hook under the shelf is
used to hold up the boot floor using its
cord, to facilitate access to the tools
and spare wheel or the temporary
puncture repair kit...
To connect a 12 V accessory
(max power: 120 W), remove the cap and
connect an appropriate adaptor.
Turn the key to the ignition on position.
12 V accessory socket
This is a removable lamp, fitted in the boot
wall, which can be used to light the boot or as
a torch.
For the boot lamp function, refer to the
"Visibility - § Boot lamp" section.
Torch
Operation
This torch operates with NiMH type
rechargeable batteries.
It has a battery life of approximately 45 minutes
and charges while you are driving.
Observe the polarities when fitting the
rechargeable batteries.
Never replace the rechargeable batteries
with normal disposable batteries.
157
Fittings
Use
Extract the torch from its location pulling it
upwards.
Press the switch, located on the back,
to switch the torch on or off.
Unfold the support, located on the back,
to set down and raise the torch; for
example, when changing a wheel.
Storing
Put the torch back in place in its location
starting with the lower part.
If you have forgotten to switch off the torch,
this switches it off automatically.
Storage box
Raise the boot carpet for access to
the storage box.
This has areas for the storage of a box of spare
bulbs, a first aid kit, two warning triangles...
It also contains the vehicle tools, the temporary
puncture repair kit...
It the torch is not engaged correctly,
it may not charge and may not come on
when the boot is opened.
007
Child safety
General points relating to child seats
Although one of CITROËN main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children
also depends on you.
CITROËN recommends that children
should travel on the rear seats of your
vehicle:
- "rearward-facing" up to the age
of 3,
- "forward-facing" over the age of 3.
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
- in accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less
than one and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats suited to
their weight , on seats fitted with a seat
belt or ISOFIX mountings * ,
- statistically, the safest seats in your
vehicle for carrying children are the
rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg must
travel in the "rearwards-facing"
position both in the front and in the
rear.
* The rules for carrying children are specific to
each country. Refer to the legislation in force
in your country.
161
Child safety
Child seat in the front *
"Rearward-facing" "Forward-facing"
Passenger seat adjusted to the intermediate
longitudinal and highest position.
When a "rearward-facing" child seat is installed
on the front passenger seat , adjust the seat
to the intermediate longitudinal and highest
position, with the backrest straightened.
The passenger airbag must be deactivated.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag were
to inflate .
* Refer to the current legislation in your country
before installing a child seat on this seat.
When a "forward-facing" child seat is installed on
the front passenger seat , adjust the vehicle's
seat to the intermediate longitudinal and highest
position with seat backrest straightened and
leave the passenger's airbag activated.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tensioned.
For child seats with a support leg,
ensure that the support leg is in stable
contact with the floor. If necessary,
adjust the passenger seat.
The warning label present on both sides of
the passenger's sun visor repeats this advice.
In line with current legislation, the following
two pages contain this warning in all of the
languages required.
Never install a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat protected by
an active front airbag. This could cause
the death of the child or serious injury.
Deactivating the passenger's airbag
Passenger airbag OFF
For information on deactivating the
airbag, refer to the "Airbags" section.
AR
BG
НИКОГА НЕ инсталирайте детско столче на седалка с АКТИВИРАНА предна ВЪЗДУШНА ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА. Това можеда причини
СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО НАРАНЯВАНЕ на детето.
CS
NIKDY neumisťujte dětské zádržné zařízení orientované směrem dozadu na sedadlo chráněné AKTIVOVANÝM čelním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí
nebezpečí SMRTI DÍTĚTE nebo VÁŽNÉHO ZRANĚNÍ.
DA
Brug aldrig en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde der er beskyttet af en aktiv airbag. Død eller alvorlig skade på barnet kan forekomme.
DE
Verwenden Sie NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder Babyschale gegen die Fahrtrichtung bei AKTIVIERTEM Airbag, TOD oder ERNSTHAFTE
VERLETZUNGEN können die Folge sein.
EL
Μη χρησιμοποιείτε ΠΟΤΕ παιδικό κάθισμα με την πλάτη του προς το εμπρός μέρος του αυτοκινήτου, σε μια θέση που προστατεύεται από
ΜΕΤΩΠΙΚΟ αερόσακο που είναι ΕΝΕΡΓΟΣ. Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν συνέπεια το ΘΑΝΑΤΟ ή το ΣΟΒΑΡΟ ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ του ΠΑΙΔΙΟΥ
EN
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur
ES
NO INSTALAR NUNCA EL SISTEMA DE RETENCIÓN PARA NIÑOS DE ESPALDAS AL SENTIDO DE LA CIRCULACIÓN SOBRE UN
ASIENTO PROTEGIDO CON UN COJÍN INFLABLE FRONTAL ( AIRBAG ) ACTIVADO. ESTO PUEDE CAUSAR LA MUERTE DEL BEBE
O HERIRLO GRAVEMENTE.
ET
Ärge kasutage kunagi lapse turvatooli seljaga sõidusuunas sõiduki istmel mis on kaitstud AKTIVEERITUD TURVAPADJAGA. See võib
põhjustada lapsele RASKEID VIGASTUSI või SURMA.
FI
ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen
laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR
NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l’arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE
frontal ACTIVÉ.
Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l’ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR
NIKADA ne postavljati dječju sjedalicu leđima u smjeru vožnje na sjedalo zaštićeno UKLJUČENIM prednjim ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM. To bi
moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TEŠKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU
SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést olyan ülésen, amely AKTIVÁLT ÁLLAPOTÚ (BEKAPCSOLT)
FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL van védve. Ez a gyermek halálát vagy súlyos sérülését okozhatja.
IT
NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale
ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT
NIEKADA neįrenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemonės su atgal atgręžtu vaiku ant sėdynės, kuri saugoma VEIKIANČIOS priekinės ORO
PAGALVĖS. Išsiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali būti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
163
Child safety
LV
NAV PIEĻAUJAMS uzstādīt uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti priekšējā pasažiera vietā, kurā ir AKTIVIZĒTS priekšējais DROŠĪBAS
GAISA SPILVENS.
Tas var izraisīt BĒRNA NĀVI vai radīt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT
Qatt m’ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f’siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista’ tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla
NL
Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND ERNSTIG OF DODELIJK GEWOND raken.
NO
Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET.
PL
NIGDY nie instalować fotelika dziecięcego w pozycji «tyłem do kierunku jazdy»na siedzeniu wyposażonym w CZOŁOWĄ PODUSZKĘ
POWIETRZNĄ w stanie AKTYWNYM.W przeciwnym razie dziecko narażone będzie na ŚMIERĆ lub BARDZO POWAŻNE OBRAŻENIA
CIAŁA w momenicie wyzwolenia poduszki powietrznej
PT
NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada, num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO.
Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA.
RO
Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG
frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA.
RU
ВО ВСЕХ СЛУЧАЯХ ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ использовать обращенное назад детское удерживающее устройство на сиденье,
защищенном ФУНКЦИОНИРУЮЩЕЙ ПОДУШКОЙ БЕЗОПАСНОСТИ, установленной перед этим сиденьем.
Это может привести к ГИБЕЛИ РЕБЕНКА или НАНЕСЕНИЮ ЕМУ СЕРЬЕЗНЫХ ТЕЛЕСНЫХ ПОВРЕЖДЕНИЙ
SK
NIKDY nepoužívajte na prednom sedadle chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM detské zadržiavacie zariadenie umiestnené v proti smere
jazdy. Môže to spôsobiť SMRŤ, alebo VÁŽNE ZRANENIE DIEŤAŤA.
SL
NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega sedeža s hrbtom v smeri vožnje, če je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedežem
AKTIVIRANA. Takšna namestitev lahko povzroči SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POŠKODBE.
SR
NIKADA ne koristite dečje sedište koje se okreće unazad na sedištu zaštićenim AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer
mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA.
SV
Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd barnstol i ett säte skyddat av en AKTIV AIRBAG framför det. Det kan orsaka ALLVARLIGA eller DÖDLIGA
skador på barnet.
TR
KESİNLKLE HAVA YASTIĞI AKTİF olan ön koltuğa yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuğu yerleştirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUĞUN ÖLMESİNE veya
ÇOK AĞIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
165
Child safety
Child seat at the rear
"Rearward facing"
When a "rearward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat , move the vehicle's
front seat forwards and straighten the backrest
so that the "rearward facing" child seat does
not touch the vehicle's front seat.
"Forward facing"
When a "forward facing" child seat is installed
on a rear passenger seat , move the vehicle's
front seat forwards and straighten the backrest
so that the legs of the child in the "forward
facing" child seat do not touch the vehicle's
front seat.
Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat .
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly
tightened. For child seats with a
support leg, ensure that the support leg
is in stable contact with the floor.
Child seats recommended by CITROËN
CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are secured using a
three point seat belt .
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
L1
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the rearwards-
facing position.
L2
"KIDDY Comfort Pro"
The impact shield must be
used for carrying young
children (from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From approxmately 6 years (from 22 kg), the booster is used on its own.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
167
Child safety
Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt
In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally
approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Seat
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 13 kg
(groups 0 (b) and 0+)
Up to ≈ 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg
(group 1)
From 1 to ≈ 3 years
From 15 to 25 kg
(group 2)
From 3 to ≈ 6 years
From 22 to 36 kg
(group 3)
From 6 to ≈ 10 years
Front passenger seat (c)
- fixed U(R1) U(R1) U(R1) U(R1)
- height adjustable U(R2) U(R2) U(R2) U(R2)
Outer rear seats (d) U U U U
Centre rear seat (d) X X X X
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats
and "car cots" cannot be installed on the
front passenger seat.
(c) Consult the legislation in force in your
country before installing your child on this
seat.
(d) To install a child seat at the rear, backward
or forward facing, move the front seat
forward, then straighten the backrest to
allow enough room for the child seat and the
child's legs.
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with
backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the
head restraint once the child seat has
been removed.
U : seating position suitable for the installation
of a child seat secured using the seat belt
and universally approved "rearward facing"
and/or "forward facing".
U(R1) : identical to U , with the vehicle's seat
backrest inclined fully forwards.
U(R2) : identical to U , with the vehicle's seat
adjusted to the highest position.
X : seating position not suitable for installing a
child seat for the weight group indicated.
169
Child safety
Your vehicle has been approved in accordance
with the latest ISOFIX regulation .
The seats, represented below, are fitted with
regulation ISOFIX mountings:
"ISOFIX" mountings
There are three rings for each seat:
- two rings A , located between the vehicle
seat back and cushion, indicated by a
marking,
- a ring B behind the seat and identified by a
marking, referred to as the Top Tether for
fixing the upper strap.
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your
vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two
latches which are secured on the two rings A .
Some seats also have an upper strap , known
as the Top Tether, which is attached to ring B .
The incorrect installation of a child seat
in a vehicle compromises the child's
protection in the event of an accident.
Follow strictly the fitting instructions provided
by with the child seat.
For information regarding the ISOFIX child
seats which can be installed in your vehicle,
refer to the table showing the locations for
installing ISOFIX child seats.
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to
the left hand rear seat, before fitting
the seat, first move the centre rear seat
belt towards the middle of the vehicle,
so as to avoid the seat interfering with
the operation of the seat belt.
- pass the upper strap of the child seat
behind the seat backrest, between the
apertures for the head restraint rods,
- fix the hook of the upper strap to the ring B ,
- tighten the upper strap.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER :
- remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on the seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed),
ISOFIX child seat recommended by CITROËN and approved for
your vehicle
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fitted with ISOFIX mountings.
In this case, it must be attached to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fitting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
ISOFIX child seat with TOP TETHER
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX
(size category B1 )
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed only in the "forward-facing" position.
Is attached to the rings A , as well as the ring B , referred to as the TOP TETHER,
using an upper strap.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
171
Child safety
Locations for ISOFIX child seats
In accordance with European Regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX
mountings.
In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G , is indicated on the child
seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
IUF: seat suitable for the installation of an I sofix U niversal seat, " F orward facing" secured using the
upper strap.
IL-SU: seat suitable for the installation of an I sofix S emi- U niversal seat either:
- "rear facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support leg,
- "forward facing" fitted with a support leg,
- an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap or a support leg.
For advice on securing of the upper strap, refer to the paragraph "ISOFIX mountings".
* Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
** The ISOFIX infant car seat, secured on the lower rings of a vehicle ISOFIX seat, occupies two rear seats.
Weight of the child /indicative age
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to approx.
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
Type of ISOFIX child seat Infant car seat * "rear facing" "rear facing" "forward facing"
ISOFIX size category F
G C D E C D A B B1
ISOFIX child seats universal and semi-universal
which can be installed on the rear outer seats
IL-SU ** IL-SU IL-SU
IUF
IL-SU
Remove and stow the head restraint
before installing a child seat with a
backrest on a passenger seat. Refit the
head restraint once the child seat has
been removed.
Advice on child seats
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's protection
in the event of an accident.
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt
buckle under the child seat, as this could
destabilise it.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harnesses keeping the slack
relative to the child's body to a minimum,
even for short journeys.
When installing a child seat using the seat
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened
correctly on the child seat and that it
secures the child seat firmly on the seat
of your vehicle. If your passenger seat is
adjustable, move it forwards if necessary.
For optimum installation of the "forward-
facing" child seat, ensure that the back of
the child seat is as close as possible to the
backrest of the vehicle's seat, in contact if
possible.
You mst remove the head restraint before
installing a child seat with backrest to a
passenger seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
attached securely to prevent it from being
thrown around the vehicle in the event of
sharp braking. Refit the head restraint when
the child seat is removed.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must be
positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
CITROËN recommends the use of a
booster seat which has a back, fitted with a
seat belt guide at shoulder level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave:
- a child or children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows
closed,
- the keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the doors
and rear windows, use the "Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the rays of
the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
At rear seating positions, always leave
sufficient space between the front seat and:
- a "rearwards facing" child seat,
- the child's feet for a child seat fitted
"forwards facing".
To do this, move the front seat forwards
and, if necessary, move its backrest into the
upright position.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying children on the
front passenger seat is specific to each
country. Refer to the legislation in force in
your country.
Deactivate the passenger airbag when a
"rearward-facing" child seat is installed on
the front seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag were
to inflate.
173
Child safety
Electric child lock
Remote control system to prevent opening of the rear doors using their interior controls and use of
the rear electric windows.
The control is located on the dashboard, driver's side.
Switching on
Press this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on,
accompanied by a message in the screen.
This indicator lamp remains on until the child
lock is switched off.
Switching off
Press this button again.
The indicator lamp on button A goes off,
accompanied by a message in the screen.
This indicator lamp remains on while child lock
is switched on.
This system is independent and in no
circumstances does it take the place of
the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock each
time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the vehicle, even for a
short time.
In the event of a serious impact, the
electric child lock is switched off
automatically to permit the exit of the
rear passengers.
Any other status of the indicator lamp
indicates a fault with the electric child
lock. Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
008
Safety
Direction indicators
Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the
point of resistance.
Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the
point of resistance.
Three fl ashes of the direction
indicators
Press briefly upwards or downwards,
without going beyond the point of
resistance; the direction indicators will
flash 3 times.
Hazard warning lamps
A visual warning by means of the direction
indicators to alert other road users to a vehicle
breakdown, towing or accident.
Press this button, the direction indicators
flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
If you forget to cancel the
direction indicators for more than
twenty seconds, the volume of the
audible signal will increase if the speed
is above 40 mph (60 km/h).
177
Safety
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the deceleration, the hazard warning lamps
come on automatically.
They switch off automatically the first time you
accelerate.
You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
Horn
Audible warning system to alert other road
users to an imminent danger.
Press the central part of the multifunction
steering wheel.
Use the horn moderately and only in
the following circumstances:
- immediate danger,
- overtaking a cyclist or pedestrian,
- approaching a location lacking
visibility.
Emergency or
assistance call
This system allows you to make an emergency
or assistance call to the emergency services or
to the dedicated CITROËN service.
For more information on the use of this
function, refer to the "Audio and telematics"
section.
Braking assistance systems
Group of supplementary systems which help
you to obtain optimum braking in complete
safety in emergency situations:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS),
- electronic brake force distribution (EBFD),
- emergency braking assistance (EBA).
Anti-lock braking system
and electronic brake force
distribution
Linked systems which improve the stability and
manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking,
in particular on poor or slippery surfaces.
Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes into
operation automatically when there is a risk of
wheel lock.
Normal operation of the ABS may make itself
felt by slight vibration of the brake pedal.
When braking in an emergency, press
very firmly without releasing the
pressure.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on,
together with the STOP and ABS
warning lamps, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the screen, it
indicates a malfunction of the electronic brake
force distribution which could result in loss of
control of the vehicle when braking.
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
When replacing wheels (tyres and
rims), ensure that they conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
If this warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message in the screen, it
indicates a malfunction of the anti-lock braking
system which could result in loss of control of
the vehicle when braking.
In either case, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
179
Safety
Emergency braking assistance
System which, in an emergency, enables you
to obtain the optimum braking pressure more
quickly, thus reducing the stopping distance.
Activation
It is triggered by the speed at which the brake
pedal is pressed.
The effect of this is a reduction in the
resistance of the pedal and an increase in
braking efficiency.
When braking in an emergency, press
firmly without releasing the pressure.
Trajectory control systems (ESP)
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
and electronic stability
control (ESC)
The anti-slip regulation (also known as traction
control) optimises traction to prevent skidding
of the wheels, by acting on the brakes of the
driving wheels and on the engine.
The electronic stability control acts on the brake
of one or more wheels and on the engine to
keep the vehicle on the trajectory required by
the driver, within the limits of the laws of physics.
Activation
These systems are activated automatically
each time the vehicle is started.
They come into operation in the event of a grip
or trajectory problem.
This is indicated by flashing of this
warning lamp in the instrument panel.
Intelligent traction control
system ("Snow motion")
Your vehicle has a system to help driving on
snow: intelligent traction control.
The use of snow tyres is strongly
recommended on surfaces offering low
levels of adhesion.
This system detects situations of difficult
surface adhesion that could make it difficult to
move off or make progress on deep fresh snow
or compacted snow.
In these situations, the intelligent traction
control limits the amount of wheel slip to
provide the best traction and trajectory control
for your vehicle.
In extremely severe conditions (deep snow,
mud, ...), when it proves impossible to move off,
it may be useful to temporarily deactivate the
ESP/ASR systems to allow the wheels to spin
freely and so allow movement of the vehicle.
Deactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground...), if you are unable to make progress,
it may be advisable to temporarily deactivate
these systems, so that the wheels can spin
freely and allow the vehicle to move.
Press the "ESP OFF" button, located near
the steering wheel.
Reactivation
These systems are reactivated automatically
each time the ignition is switched back on or
from 30 mph (50 km/h).
Press the "ESP OFF" button again to
reactivate them manually.
Operating fault
The trajectory control systems offer
increased safety in normal driving, but
this should not encourage the driver to
take extra risks or drive at high speed.
The correct functioning of these
systems is assured provided that
manufacturer's recommendations are
observed on:
- wheels (tyres and rims),
- braking components,
- electronic components,
- assembly and repair procedures.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If this warning lamp in the instrument
panel and the " ESP OFF " indicator
lamp in the button come on,
accompanied by an audible signal and
a message in the screen, this indicates a fault
with these systems.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
It is recommended that the systems be
reactivated as soon as possible.
If the indicator lamp in the button comes
on, this indicates that these systems are
deactivated.
181
Safety
Seat belts
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pretensioning and force limiting system.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat
belts against the body of the occupants.
The pretensioning seat belts are active when
the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant,
so improving their protection.
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
Seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp in
the instrument panel
When the ignition is switched on,
this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel if the driver and/
or the front passenger has not fastened their
seat belt.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h)
this warning lamp flashes for two minutes
accompanied by an audible signal of increasing
volume. Once these two minutes have elapsed,
this warning lamp remains on until the driver
and/or the front passenger fastens their seat
belt.
Height adjustment
To lower the attachment point, squeeze the
control A and slide it downwards.
To raise the attachment point, slide the
control A upwards.
Rear seat belts
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the
buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
Press the red button on the buckle.
Guide the seat belt as it reels in.
On the outer seat belts, raise the bar to the
top of the backrest to prevent the tongue
from knocking against the side trim.
The rear seats are each fitted with a three-point
seat belt, with force limiter and, for the outer
seats, an effort limiter.
Seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamps
display
1. Driver's seat belt not fastened / unfastened
warning lamp.
2. Front passenger's seat belt not fastened /
unfastened warning lamp.
The corresponding warning lamp 1 or 2 comes
on in red on the seat belt and passenger's front
airbag warning lamps display, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message in the screen,
if the seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened.
183
Safety
Seat belt unfastened warning
lamp in the instrument panel
This warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel when one or more rear
passengers unfasten their seat belt.
Seat belt unfastened warning
lamps display
3. Right hand rear seat belt warning lamp.
4. Centre rear seat belt warning lamp.
5. Left hand rear seat belt warning lamp.
When the ignition is switched on, with the
engine running or when the vehicle is moving at
less than 12 mph (20 km/h), the corresponding
warning lamps 3 , 4 and 5 come on in red for
approximately 30 seconds, if the seat belt is not
fastened.
When the vehicle is moving at more than 12 mph
(20 km/h), the corresponding warning lamps 3 ,
4 and 5 come on in red, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the screen, if a
rear passenger has unfastened their seat belt.
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h),
this warning lamp flashes for two minutes
accompanied by an audible signal of increasing
volume. Once these two minutes have elapsed,
this warning lamp remains on until the one or
more rear passengers fasten their seat belt.
The driver must ensure that passengers use
the seat belts correctly and that they are all
restrained securely before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the vehicle,
always fasten your seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as
they will not fulfil their role fully.
The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel
permitting automatic adjustment of the length
of the strap to your size. The seat belt is
stowed automatically when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat
belt is reeled in correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible on the pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic
locking device which comes into operation in
the event of a collision, emergency braking
or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release
the device by pulling firmly on the strap and
releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
- be tightened as close to the body as
possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not
twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
- not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modified to avoid
affecting its performance.
In accordance with current safety
regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle,
go to a qualified workshop with the skills and
equipment needed, which a CITROËN dealer
is able to provide.
Have your seat belts checked regularly by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,
particularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or
a textile cleaning product, sold by CITROËN
dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
and reeled in correctly.
Recommendations for
children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is
less than 12 years old or shorter than one
and a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure
more than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your lap.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and
seriousness of the impact , the
pretensioning device may be deployed
before and independently of the airbags.
Deployment of the pretensioners is
accompanied by a slight discharge of
harmless smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat belts
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
185
Safety
Airbags
System designed to maximise the safety of the
occupants (with the exception of the rear centre
passenger) in the event of violent collisions.
The airbags supplement the action of the force-
limiting seat belts (with the exception of the
centre rear passenger).
If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors
record and analyse the front and side impacts
sustained in the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute
towards better protection of the occupants
of the vehicle (with the exception of the
rear centre passenger); immediately after
the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so
that they do not hinder visibility or the exit
of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear impact
or in certain roll-over conditions, the
airbags will not be deployed; the seat belt
alone contributes towards ensuring your
protection in these situations.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once.
If a second impact occurs (during the
same or a subsequent accident), the
airbag will not be deployed again.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
Deployment of the airbag(s) is
accompanied by a slight emission
of smoke and a noise, due to the
activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge
incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience slight
irritation.
The noise of the detonation may result
in a slight loss of hearing for a short
time.
Front airbags
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious front impact
in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and
thorax.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the
passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in
the event of a serious front impact to all or part
of the front impact zone A , in the longitudinal
centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane
and directed from the front to the rear of the
vehicle.
The front airbag inflates between the thorax
and head of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the
dashboard, passenger's side to cushion their
forward movement.
187
Safety
Deactivation
Only the passenger's front airbag can be
deactivated:
insert the key in the passenger airbag
deactivation switch,
turn it to the "OFF" position,
then, remove the key keeping the switch in
the new position.
According to version, this warning
lamp comes on in the instrument
panel and/or in the seat belt and
passenger's front airbag warning lamps display
when the ignition is on and until the airbag is
reactivated.
To assure the safety of your child,
the passenger's front airbag must
be deactivated when you install a
"rear facing" child seat on the front
passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk being
seriously injured or killed if the airbag
were deployed.
Reactivation
When you remove the child seat, turn the
switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the
airbag and so assure the safety of your front
passenger in the event of an impact.
With the ignition on, this warning
lamp comes on in the seat belt and
passenger's front airbag warning
lamps display for approximately one
minute, if the passenger's front airbag
is activated.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked. The
airbags may no longer be deployed in the event
of a serious impact.
Lateral airbags
System which protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious side impact
in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest,
between the hip and the shoulder.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
frame, door side.
Deployment Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in
the event of a serious side impact applied to all
or part of the side impact zone B , perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and
shoulder of the front occupant of the vehicle
and the corresponding door trim panel.
189
Safety
Curtain airbags
System which protects the driver and
passengers (with the exception of the rear
centre passenger) in the event of a serious side
impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the
side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same
time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the
event of a serious side impact applied to all or
part of the side impact zone B , perpendicular
to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a
horizontal plane and directed from the outside
towards the inside of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag inflates between the front or
rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
Operating fault
In the event of a minor impact or bump
on the side of the vehicle or if the
vehicle rolls over, the airbag may not be
deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision,
the airbag is not deployed.
If this warning lamp comes on in the
instrument panel, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message
in the screen, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop to have the system
checked. The airbags may no longer be
deployed in the event of a serious impact.
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its
spokes or resting your hands on the centre
part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the
dashboard.
If possible, do not smoke as deployment of
the airbags can cause burns or the risk of
injury from a cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or
hit it violently.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats,
compatible with the deployment the lateral
airbags. For information on the range of seat
covers suitable for your vehicle, you can
contact a CITROËN dealer (see "Practical
information - § Accessories").
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
backs (clothing...). This could cause injury
to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is
deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body any
nearer to the door than necessary.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof.
This could cause injury to the head if the
curtain airbag is deployed.
If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the
grab handles installed on the roof, they play
a part in securing the curtain airbags.
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the occupants
and the airbags (a child, pet, object...). This
could hamper the operation of the airbags or
injure the occupants.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolen or broken into, have the airbag
systems checked.
All work on the airbag system must be
carried out by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms when an
airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
191
Safety
009
Driving
Electric parking brake
The electric parking brake combines
2 operational modes:
- Automatic Application/Release
Application is automatic when the engine
stops, release is automatic on use of the
accelerator (activated by default),
- Manual Application/Release
The parking brake can be applied /
released manually by pulling control
lever A .
Do not place any object (packet of
cigarettes, telephone...) between the
gear lever and the electric parking
brake control lever.
It is recommended that you do not
apply the parking brake in very cold
conditions (ice) and during towing
(breakdown, caravan...). Deactivate the
automatic functions and release the
parking brake manually.
If this warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel, the automatic
mode is deactivated.
Programming the mode
Depending on the country of sale of the vehicle,
the automatic application when the engine is
switched off and the automatic release when
you press the accelerator can be deactivated.
Activation / deactivation is done
using the vehicle configuration
menu; refer to the section covering
the configuration of your vehicle's
systems.
The parking brake is then applied and released
manually. When the driver's door is opened,
there is an audible signal and a message is
displayed if the brake is not applied.
195
Driving
With the ignition on or the engine running, to
release the parking brake, press on the brake
pedal or the accelerator, pull then release
control A .
Manual release
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure
that parking brake warning lamp in
the instrument panel is on fixed, not
flashing.
Manual application
With the vehicle stationary, to apply the parking
brake whether the engine is running or off, pull
control lever A .
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- illumination of the braking warning
lamp and of the P warning lamp in
the control lever A ,
- display of the message "Parking
brake on".
When the driver’s door is opened with the
engine running, a message is displayed
accompanied by an audible signal if the parking
brake has not been applied, except in the case
of an automatic gearbox with the gear lever in
position P .
The full application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- the braking warning lamp and
the P warning lamp in the control
lever A going off,
- display of the message "Parking
brake off".
If you pull control lever A without pressing
the brake pedal, the parking brake will
not be released and a warning lamp will
come on in the instrument panel.
Maximum application
If necessary, you can make a maximum
application of the parking brake. This is
obtained by means of a long pull on the control
lever A , until you see the message "Parking
brake on maximum" and a beep is heard.
Maximum application is essential:
- in the case of a vehicle towing a caravan
or a trailer, if the automatic functions are
activated but you are applying the parking
brake manually,
- when the gradient you are parked on may
vary (e.g. on a ferry, on a lorry, during
towing).
In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle
or parking on a gradient, make a
maximum application of the parking
brake then turn the front wheels
towards the pavement and engage a
gear when you park.
After a maximum application, the
release time will be longer.
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is automatically applied when the engine is
switched off.
Automatic application,
engine off
In the case of towing, a loaded vehicle
or parking on a gradient, turn the front
wheels towards the pavement and
engage a gear when you park.
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure
that parking brake warning lamp in
the instrument panel is on fixed (not
flashing).
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle with the ignition on, as they
could release the parking brake.
- illumination of the braking warning
lamp and of the P warning lamp in
the control lever A ,
- display of the message "Parking
brake on".
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
Automatic release
The electric parking brake releases
automatically and progressively when you
press the accelerator:
Manual gearbox: press down fully on the
clutch pedal, engage first gear or reverse,
press on the accelerator pedal and move off.
Electronic gearbox : select position A , M
or R then press on the accelerator pedal.
Automatic gearbox : select position D , M
or R then press the accelerator pedal.
When stationary, with the engine running, do
not press the accelerator pedal unnecessarily,
as you may release the parking brake.
Full release of the parking brake is confirmed by:
- the braking warning lamp and
the P warning lamp in the control
lever A going off,
- display of the message "Parking
brake off".
197
Driving
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, in order to immobilise the vehicle
it is essential to manually apply the parking
brake by pulling control lever A .
Immobilising the vehicle,
engine running
The emergency braking must only be
used in exceptional circumstances.
Before leaving the vehicle, ensure
that parking brake warning lamp in
the instrument panel is on fixed, not
flashing.
The application of the parking brake is
confirmed by:
- illumination of the braking
warning lamp and the P warning
lamp in the control lever A ,
- display of the message "Parking
brake on".
When the driver’s door is opened, a message is
displayed accompanied by an audible signal, if
the parking brake has not been applied, except
in the case of an automatic gearbox with the
gear lever in position P .
Particular situations
In certain situations (e.g. starting the engine),
the parking brake can automatically alter its
force. This is normal operation.
To advance your vehicle a few centimetres
without starting the engine, but with the ignition
on, press on the brake pedal and release the
parking brake by pulling then releasing the
control lever A . The full release of the parking
brake is confirmed by the warning lamps in
the control lever A and in the instrument panel
going off and display of the message "Parking
brake off".
If the parking brake develops a fault while
applied or if the battery runs flat, an
emergency release is always possible.
Emergency braking
In the event of failure of the electronic
stability control system, signalled
by the illumination of this warning
lamp, braking stability is then not
guaranteed.
In this event, stability must be assured by the
driver by repeating alternate "pull-release"
actions on the control lever A .
In the event of a failure of the main service
brake or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver
taken ill, under instruction, etc) a continuous
pull on the control lever A will stop the vehicle.
The electronic stability control provides stability
during emergency braking.
If the emergency braking malfunctions,
the message "Parking brake faulty" will be
displayed.
In the event of the electric parking brake
malfunctioning or the battery running flat, an
emergency device can be used to release the
parking brake manually.
Emergency release
Immobilise the vehicle (or keep it stationary,
if the brake pedal is pressed), with the
engine running, by engaging first gear
(manual gearbox), position P (automatic
gearbox) or position M or R (electronic
gearbox).
Switch off the engine but leave the ignition
on. If it is not possible to immobilise the
vehicle, do not operate the control and
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
Immobilise the vehicle by placing the chocks
in front or behind the two front wheels,
opposite to the direction of the slope.
Access to tools
The tools are stowed in the storage box under
the boot carpet.
B Chocks*.
C Release crank*.
* Available according to equipment: if these
tools are not present, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop to obtain them.
199
Driving
For safety reasons, after this operation
it is essential to contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop without
delay to replace the protective cover.
Following an emergency unlocking,
immobilisation of the vehicle is no
longer assured once the manual
emergency release has been deployed
and the manual control does not allow
the re-application of your parking
brake.
Take no action, either on the control
lever A , or stopping starting the engine
while the release device is engaged.
Take care not to allow moisture or dust
in the proximity of the protective cover.
Remove the storage box under the boot
carpet for access to the emergency release
crank.
Pierce the protective cover D on the tube E
with the release crank.
Introduce the release crank into the tube.
Turn the release crank clockwise . For
safety reasons , it is essential to continue
turning the crank until it reaches its stop.
The parking brake is released.
Remove the release crank and stow it with
the chocks in the storage box under the
boot carpet.
- Switch the ignition off and then on to
reinitialise the parking brake. If the
reinitialisation of the parking brake proves
impossible, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
- The subsequent time required for
application may be longer than during
normal operation.
Operating faults
If the electric parking brake malfunction warning lamp comes on together with one or more of the warning lamps presented in these tables, place the
vehicle in a safe condition (on level ground, gear engaged) and contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Situations Consequences
Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the
following warning lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The electric parking brake can only be used manually.
Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the
following warning lamps:
- Manual release of the electric parking brake is only available by pressing
the accelerator pedal and releasing the control.
- Hill start assist is not available.
- The automatic functions and the manual application are still available.
Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the
following warning lamps:
- The automatic functions are deactivated.
- Hill start assist is not available.
201
Driving
Situations Consequences
To apply the electric parking brake:
immobilise the vehicle and switch off the ignition.
pull the control for at least 5 seconds or until application is complete.
switch on the ignition and check the switching on of the electric parking brake
warning lamps.
The application is slower than during normal operation.
To release the electric parking brake:
switch on the ignition.
pull the control and hold it for approximately 3 seconds then release it.
If the braking warning lamp is flashing or if the warning lamps do not come on with
the ignition on, these procedures will not work. Place the vehicle on level ground
and have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
and possibly
flashing
Display of the message " Parking brake fault " and of the
following warning lamps:
- Only the automatic application on switching off the engine and automatic
release on acceleration functions are available.
- The manual application/release of the electric parking brake and the
emergency braking are not available.
and possibly
flashing
Battery fault - If the battery warning lamp comes on you must stop immediately as soon as
the traffic allows. Stop and immobilise your vehicle (if necessary, place the
two chocks under the wheels).
- Apply the electric parking brake before switching off the engine.
Manual parking brake
Applying
Pull the parking brake lever fully up to
immobilise your vehicle.
Releasing
Pull the parking brake lever up gently,
press the release button then lower the
lever fully.
When parking on a slope, direct your
wheels against the kerb, apply the
parking brake, engage a gear and
switch off the ignition.
When the vehicle is being driven,
if this warning lamp and the STOP
warning lamp come on, accompanied
by an audible signal and a message in the
multifunction screen, this indicates that the
parking brake is still on or has not been
properly released.
203
Driving
6-speed manual gearbox
Raise the ring under the knob and move
the gear lever to the left then forwards.
Engaging reverse gear
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
Engaging 5
th
or 6
th
gear
Move the lever fully to the right to engage
5
th
or 6
th
gear.
Six-speed electronic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation or the pleasure of manual gear
changing.
There are two driving modes:
- automated mode for automatic control
of the gears by the gearbox, without any
action on the part of the driver
- manual mode for sequential gear changing
by the driver using the steering mounted
paddles.
In automated mode, you can temporarily take
over control of gear changing.
Electronic gearbox
R. Reverse
With your foot on the brake, lift the lever
and push forwards.
N. Neutral.
With your foot on the brake, select this
position to start.
A. Automated mode.
Move the lever backwards to select this
mode.
M. Sequential mode with manual gear
changing.
Move the lever backwards then to the left
to select this mode, then use the steering
mounted control paddles to change gear.
Gear lever
+. Change up paddle to the right of the
steering wheel.
Press the back of the "+" steering mounted
paddle to change up a gear.
-. Change down paddle to the left of the
steering wheel.
Press the back of the "-" steering mounted
paddle to change down a gear.
Steering mounted control paddles
The steering mounted paddles cannot
be used to select neutral or to engage
or disengage reverse gear.
205
Driving
Gear lever positions
N. Neutral
R. Reverse
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
Gears in sequential mode.
AUTO. This comes on when the automated
mode is selected. It switches off on
changing to sequential mode.
Displays in the instrument panel
Moving off
N flashes in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the multifunction screen, if the
gear lever is not in position N on starting.
Select position N .
Press the brake pedal down fully.
Start the engine.
N appears in the instrument panel
screen.
Select automated mode (position A ) or
sequential mode (position M ) or reverse
(position R ).
Release the parking brake unless it is
programmed to automatic mode.
Progressively take your foot off the
brake pedal.
Accelerate away.
AUTO and 1 , 1 or R appear in the
instrument panel screen.
You must press the brake pedal when
starting the engine.
The Foot on brake warning
lamp comes on the instrument
panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message in the
screen, if the brake pedal is not pressed
on starting the engine.
For optimum acceleration, for example
when overtaking another vehicle, press
the accelerator pedal firmly past the
point of resistance.
Temporary control of gear
changing
You can temporarily take over control of
gear changing using the "+" and "-" steering
mounted paddles: if the engine speed allows,
the request to change gear is acted on.
This function allows you to anticipate certain
situations such as overtaking a vehicle or the
approach to a corner.
After a few moments without any action on
the control paddles, the gearbox resumes
automatic control of the gears.
Manual mode
Select position A .
Automated mode
AUTO and the gear engaged
appear in the instrument panel
screen.
The gearbox operates in auto-active mode,
without any action on the part of the driver. It
continuously selects the most suitable gear for:
- optimisation of fuel consumption,
- the style of driving,
- the profile of the road.
- the vehicle load.
Select position M .
The gears engaged appear in succession in the
instrument panel screen.
The gear change requests are
only acted on if the engine speed
permits.
It is not necessary to release the accelerator
during gear changes.
When braking or slowing down, the gearbox
changes down automatically to allow the
vehicle to accelerate in the correct gear.
On sharp acceleration, the gearbox will not
change up unless the driver acts on the gear
lever or the steering mounted paddles.
Never select neutral N when driving.
Never select neutral N while the vehicle
is moving.
You can change mode at any time by
moving the gear lever from A to M or
the other way round.
207
Driving
Stopping the vehicle Operating fault
With the ignition on, the flashing of AUTO ,
accompanied by an audible signal and a
message in the screen, indicates a malfunction
of the gearbox.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
When immobilising the vehicle, with
the engine running, you must place the
gear lever in neutral N .
Before carrying out any work in the
engine compartment, ensure that the
gear lever is in neutral N and that the
parking brake is applied.
Whatever the circumstances, you must
manually apply the parking brake when
parking, unless the parking brake is
programmed in automatic mode.
Before switching off the engine, you can:
- move to position N to engage neutral,
or
- leave the gear engaged; in this case, it will
not be possible to move the vehicle.
To engage reverse gear R , the vehicle must be
immobilised with your foot on the brake pedal.
Select position R .
At low high speed, if reverse gear is requested,
the N indicator flashes and the gearbox goes
into neutral automatically. To engage reverse,
put the gear lever in position N , then position R .
In both cases, you must apply the parking
brake to immobilise the vehicle.
Reverse
Engagement of reverse gear is
accompanied by an audible signal.
Automatic gearbox
Gear selection gate
Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully automatic
operation, enhanced by sport and snow
programmes, or manual gear changing.
Four driving modes are offered:
- automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox,
- sport programme for a more dynamic style
of driving,
- snow programme to improve driving when
traction is poor,
- manual operation for sequential changing
of the gears by the driver.
1. Gear lever.
2. Button "S" (sport) .
3. Button " " (snow) .
Gear lever
P. Park.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on or off.
- Starting the engine.
R. Reverse.
- Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary,
engine at idle.
N. Neutral.
- Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on.
- Starting the engine.
D. Automatic operation.
M +/- . Manual operation with sequential
changing of the six gears.
Press forwards to change up through the
gears.
or
Press rearwards to change down through
the gears.
Displays in the instrument panel
When you move the lever in the gate to select
a position, the corresponding indicator is
displayed in the instrument panel.
P. Park
R. Reverse
N. Neutral
D. Drive (Automatic driving)
S. Sport programme
. Snow programme
1 to 6. Gear engaged during manual operation
-. Invalid value during manual operation
209
Driving
Moving off
With your foot on the brake, select
position P or N .
Start the engine.
If this procedure is not followed, there is an
audible signal, accompanied by a message in
the multifunction screen.
With the engine running, press the brake
pedal.
Release the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to automatic mode.
Select position R , D or M ,
Gradually release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves off immediately.
If position N is engaged inadvertently
while driving, allow the engine to
return to idle then engage position D to
accelerate.
When the engine is running at idle, with
the brakes released, if position R , D
or M is selected, the vehicle moves
even without the accelerator being
pressed.
When the engine is running, never
leave children in the vehicle without
supervision.
When carrying out maintenance with
the engine running, apply the parking
brake and select position P .
Automatic operation
Select position D for automatic changing
of the six gears.
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive
mode, without any intervention on the part
of the driver. It continuously selects the most
suitable gear according to the style of driving,
the profile of the road and the load in the
vehicle.
For maximum acceleration without touching
the lever, press the accelerator pedal down
fully (kick down). The gearbox changes down
automatically or maintains the gear selected
until the maximum engine speed is reached.
On braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide efficient engine
braking.
If you release the accelerator sharply, the
gearbox will not change to a higher gear for
safety reasons.
Never select position N while the
vehicle is moving.
Never select positions P or R unless
the vehicle is completely stationary.
Manual operation
Select position M for sequential changing
of the six gears.
Push the lever towards the + sign to
change up a gear.
Pull the lever towards the - sign to change
down a gear.
It is only possible to change from one gear to
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed
permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate
temporarily in automatic mode.
D disappears and the gears
engaged appear in succession in the
instrument panel.
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the
gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then
the actual gear engaged is displayed.
It is possible to change from position D
(automatic) to position M (manual) at any time.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving
very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1
automatically.
The sport and snow programmes do not
operate in manual mode.
Sport and snow programmes
Sport programme "S"
Press button "S" , after starting the engine.
The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic
style of driving.
S appears in the instrument panel.
Snow programme " "
Press button " ", after starting the engine.
The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery
roads.
This programme improves starting and drive
when traction is poor.
appears in the instrument panel.
Return to automatic
operation
At any time, press the button selected
again to quit the programme engaged and
return to auto-adaptive mode.
These two special programmes supplement the
automatic operation in very specific conditions
of use.
211
Driving
Invalid value during manual
operation
This symbol is displayed if a gear
is not engaged correctly (selector
between two positions).
Stopping the vehicle
Before switching off the engine, you can
engage position P or N to place the gearbox in
neutral.
In both cases, apply the parking brake to
immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed
to automatic mode.
If the lever is not in position P , when the
driver's door is opened or approximately
45 seconds after the ignition is switched
off, there is an audible signal and a
message appears.
Return the lever to position P ;
the audible signal stops and the
message disappears.
Operating fault
When the ignition is on, the lighting of this
warning lamp, accompanied by an audible
signal and a message in the multifunction
screen, indicates a gearbox malfunction.
In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up
mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel
a substantial knock when changing from P
to R and from N to R . This will not cause any
damage to the gearbox.
Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h), local speed
restrictions permitting.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This warning lamp may also come on if a door
is opened.
You risk damaging the gearbox:
- if you press the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time,
- if you force the lever from position P
to another position when the
battery is flat.
To reduce fuel consumption when
stationary for long periods with the
engine running (traffic jam...), position
the gear lever at N and apply the
parking brake, unless it is programmed
in automatic mode.
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised
temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when
starting on a gradient, the time it takes to
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal,
- when certain conditions of gradient are
met,
- with the driver’s door closed.
The hill start assist function cannot be
deactivated.
Hill start assist
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle
stationary, the vehicle is held for a brief
moment when you release the brake pedal:
- if you are in first gear or neutral with a
manual gearbox,
- if you are in position A or M with an
electronic gearbox.
- if you are in position D or M with an
automatic gearbox.
Operation
Operating fault
If a fault occurs with the system, these warning
lamps come on. Contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop to have the system
checked.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is
being held in the hill start assist phase.
If you need to leave the vehicle while
the engine is running, apply the parking
brake manually then ensure that the
parking brake warning lamp is on (not
flashing) in the instrument panel.
On a descending slope, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged, the
vehicle is held for a brief moment when you
release the brake pedal.
213
Driving
Gear effi ciency indicator
System which reduces fuel consumption by advising the driver to change up.
With an electronic gearbox, the system is only active in manual mode.
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and your
vehicle's equipment, the system may advise
you to skip one (or more) gear(s). You can
follow this instruction without engaging the
intermediate gears.
The gear engagement recommendations must
not be considered compulsory. In fact, the
configuration of the road, the amount of traffic
and safety remain determining factors when
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the advice given by the system.
This function cannot be deactivated.
- The system may suggest that you engage
a higher gear.
The information appears in the instrument
panel in the form of an arrow.
On vehicles with manual gearbox, the arrow
can be accompanied by the recommended
gear.
The system adapts its gear change
recommendation according to the
driving conditions (slope, load, ...) and
the demands of the driver (power,
acceleration, braking, ...).
The system never suggests:
- engaging first gear,
- engaging reverse gear,
- engaging a lower gear.
Example:
- You are in third gear.
- You press the accelerator pedal.
Tyre under-infl ation detection
System which automatically checks the
pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system continuously monitors the
pressures of the four tyres, as soon as the
vehicle is moving.
A pressure sensor is located in the valve of a
each tyres (except the spare wheel).
The system triggers an alert if a drop in
pressure is detected in one or more tyres.
The tyre under-inflation detection system is
an aid to driving which does not replace the
need for the driver to be vigilant or to drive
responsibly.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
increases fuel consumption.
The tyre pressures for your vehicle
can be found on the tyre pressure
label (see the "Identification markings"
section).
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres cold (vehicle stopped
for 1 hour or after driving for less then
6 miles (10 km) at moderate speed).
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the values
indicated on the label.
This system does not avoid the need
to check the tyre pressures regularly
(including the spare wheel) and before
a long journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres
adversely affects road holding,
extends braking distances and causes
premature tyre wear, particularly under
arduous conditions (vehicle loaded,
high speed, long journey).
215
Driving
Under-inflation alert
The loss of pressure detected does
not always lead to visible deformation
of the tyre. Do not rely on just a visual
check.
This alert is also displayed when one or
more wheels is not fitted with a sensor.
The alert is maintained until the tyre
or tyres concerned is reinflated or
repaired.
The alert is given by the fixed illumination
of this warning lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal, and depending on
equipment, the display of a message.
In the event of a problem on one of the tyres,
the symbol or the message appears, according
to equipment, to identify it.
Reduce speed, avoid sudden steering
movements or harsh brake applications.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (according to equipment),
or
if you have a compressor, the one in the
temporary puncture repair kit for example,
check the four tyre pressures when cold,
or
if it is not possible to check the tyre
pressures at the time, drive carefully at
reduced speed.
Operating fault
The flashing and then fixed illumination
of the under-inflation warning lamp
accompanied by the illumination of the
"service" warning lamp indicates a fault
with the system.
In this case, monitoring of the tyre pressures is
not assured.
Have the system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Stop & Start
The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, or other...).
The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently.
Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode
With an electronic gearbox, for your
comfort during parking maoeuvres,
STOP mode is not available for a few
seconds after coming out of reverse
gear.
STOP mode does not affect the
functionality of the vehicle, such as
braking, power steering, for example.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode; you must switch off the ignition
with the key.
The "ECO" warning lamp comes on
in the instrument panel and the engine
goes into standby automatically:
- with a manual gearbox , at speeds below
12 mph (20 km/h), when you put the gear
lever into neutral and release the clutch
pedal,
- with an electronic gearbox , at a speed
below 5 mph (8 km/h), when you press
the brake pedal or put the gear lever into
position N .
If your vehicle is fitted with the
system, a time counter calculates
the sum of the periods in STOP
mode during a journey. It resets
itself to zero every time the ignition
is switched on with the key.
STOP mode is not invoked when:
- the driver's door is open,
- the driver's seat belt is not fastened,
- the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start using
the key,
- the electric parking brake is applied or
being applied,
- the engine is needed to maintain a
comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment,
- demisting is active,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
Special cases: STOP mode
unavailable
In this case, the "ECO" warning
lamp flashes for a few seconds, then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
217
Driving
Going into engine START mode
The "ECO" warning lamp goes off
and the engine starts automatically:
- with a manual gearbox , when you fully
depress the clutch pedal,
- with an electronic gearbox :
● gear lever in position A or M , when you
release the brake pedal,
● or gear lever in position N and the brake
pedal released, when you move the gear
lever to position A or M ,
● or when you engage reverse gear.
Special cases: START invoked
automatically
If the system has been deactivated
in STOP mode, the engine restarts
immediately.
With a manual gearbox in STOP mode,
if a gear is engaged without fully
depressing the clutch pedal, a warning
lamp comes on or an alert message
is displayed asking you to depress the
clutch pedal to restart the engine.
At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to
deactivate the system.
This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp
coming on accompanied by the display of a
message.
Deactivation
In this case the "ECO" warning
lamp flashes for few seconds, then
goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
For safety reasons or to ensure smooth
operation, START mode is invoked
automatically when:
- you open the driver's door,
- you unfasten the driver's seat belt,
- the speed of the vehicle exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) with a manual gearbox or 7 mph
(11 km/h) with an electronic gearbox,
- the electric parking brake is being applied,
- some special conditions (battery charge,
engine temperature, braking assistance,
ambient temperature...) where the engine is
needed to assure control of a system.
The system is reactivated automatically
at every new start using the key.
Reactivation
This system requires a specific battery with a
special specification and technology (reference
numbers available from a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop).
Fitting a battery not listed by CITROËN
introduces the risk of malfunction of the
system.
In the event of a malfunction with the system,
the "ECO OFF" switch warning lamp flashes,
then comes on continuously.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Operating fault Maintenance
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from automatic operation of
START mode.
The Stop & Start system makes use
of advanced technology. All work on
this type of battery must be done only
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again.
The system is active again; this is confirmed
by the switch warning lamp going off and the
display of a message.
In the event of a fault in STOP
mode, the vehicle may stall. All of
the instrument panel warning lamps
come on.
Depending on version, an alert
message may also be displayed asking
you to put the gear lever into position N
and put your foot on the brake pedal.
It is then necessary to switch off the
ignition, then restart the engine using
the key.
219
Driving
Blind spot sensors
This driving assistance system warns the driver
of the presence of another vehicle in the blind
spot angle of their vehicle (areas masked from
the driver's field of vision), as soon as this
presents a potential danger.
Operation
This system is designed to improve safety when driving and is in no circumstances a
substitute for the use of the interior rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is the driver's
responsibility to constantly check the traffic, to asses the distances and relative speeds of
other vehicles and to predict their movements before deciding whether to change lane.
The blind spot sensor system can never replace the vigilance and responsibility of the
driver.
On switching on the ignition, or engine
running, press this button to activate the
function; the warning lamp comes on.
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers
monitor the blind spots.
A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on
the side in question:
- immediately, when being overtaken,
- after a delay of about one second, when
overtaking a vehicle slowly.
No alert will be given in the following situations:
- in the presence of stationary objects
(parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps,
road signs...),
- with vehicles moving in the opposite
direction,
- driving on a sinuous road or a sharp
corner,
The alert is given by a warning lamp which
comes on in the door mirror on the side in
question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry,
cycle - is detected and the following conditions
are fulfilled:
- all the vehicles must be moving in the
same direction,
- the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and
75 mph (12 and 140 km/h),
- the difference in speed between your
vehicle and the other vehicles must be less
than 6 mph (10 km/h),
- the traffic must be flowing normally,
- in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre,
if this is prolonged and the vehicle being
overtaken remains in the blind spot,
- you are driving on a straight or slightly
curved road,
- your vehicle is not pulling a trailer,
a caravan...
- when overtaking (or being overtaken by) a
very long vehicle (lorry, coach...) which is
at the same time detected at the rear in the
blind spot angle and present in the driver's
forward field of vision,
- in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in
front and behind are confused with a lorry
or a stationary object,
- when overtaking quickly.
221
Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault, the warning lamp in the
button flashes then goes off.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The system may suffer temporary
interference in certain weather
conditions (rain, hail...).
In particular, driving on a wet surface
or moving from a dry area to a wet area
can cause false alerts (for example, the
presence of a fog of water droplets in
the blind spot angle is interpreted as a
vehicle).
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that
the sensors are not covered by mud,
ice or snow.
Take care not to cover the warning
zone in the door mirrors or the
detection zones on the front and rear
bumpers with adhesive labels or other
objects; they may hamper the correct
operation of the system.
To deactivate the system, press this button
again; the warning lamp goes off.
The state of the system remains in memory on
switching off the ignition.
The system is automatically
deactivated when towing with a towbar
approved by CITROËN.
Memorising speeds
This memorisation of speeds applies to both the speed limiter and the cruise control.
You can memorise up to 5 speeds in the system. By default, a few speeds are already memorised.
With your Audio system
Go to the main menu by pressing the
"MENU" button.
Select the "Personalisation-configuration"
menu and confirm.
Select "Vehicle parameters" menu and
confirm.
Select the "Driving assistance" line and
conform.
Select "Speeds memorised" line and
confirm.
Modify the speed.
Select " OK " and confirm to save the
modifications.
With the eMyWay satellite
navigation system
Press the "MEM" button to display the list
of speeds memorised.
Access
For safety reasons, the driver must
only carry out these operations when
stationary.
Go to the main menu by pressing the left
hand thumb wheel at the bottom of the
steering wheel.
Select the "Vehicle parameters" menu and
confirm.
Select the "Driving assistance" line and confirm.
Select the "Speeds memorised" line and
confirm.
Modify the speed.
Select " OK " and confirm to save the
modifications.
These operations are only possible
when stationary with this system.
Selection
To select a memorised speed:
press and hold the " + " or " - " button; the
system stops at the nearest memorised
speed,
press and hold again the " + " or " - " button to
select another memorised speed.
A reminder of the speed and the state of the
system (on/off) is displayed in the instrument
panel.
223
Driving
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.
When the programmed speed limit is reached,
pressing the accelerator pedal no longer has
any effect.
Speed limiter
The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need to respect speed limits,
nor can it replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the driver.
The functions of this system are grouped
together on the steering mounted controls.
1. Speed limiter mode selection wheel.
2. Programmed value decrease button.
3. Programmed value increase button.
4. Speed limiter on / off button.
5. List of memorised speeds display button.
(see the "Memorising speeds" section)
Steering mounted controls
The programmed information is grouped
together in the instrument panel screen.
6. Speed limiter on / off indication.
7. Speed limiter mode selection indication.
8. Programmed speed value.
9. Selection of a memorised speed.
(see "Memorising speeds")
Displays in the instrument panel
Operation
The speed limiter is switched on manually: it
requires a programmed speed of at least
20 mph (30 km/h).
The speed limiter is switched off by manual
operation of the control.
The programmed speed can be exceeded
temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly
beyond the point of resistance.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal.
The programmed speed remains in the memory
when the ignition is switched off.
Turn dial 1 to the "LIMIT" position: the
speed limiter mode is selected but is not
switched on (Pause).
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
in order to set the speed.
Set the speed value by pressing button 2
or 3 (e.g.: 55 mph (90 km/h)).
Programming
You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3 :
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.
If speed memorisation is available and activated on your vehicle, the
programmed speed will stop at the closest memorised speed; refer to the
corresponding paragraph.
Switch the speed limiter on by pressing button 4 .
Switch the speed limiter off by pressing button 4 : the display
confirms that it has been switched off (Pause).
Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4 again.
Exceeding the programmed speed
Pressing the accelerator pedal to exceed the programmed speed will not have
any effect unless you press the pedal firmly past the point of resistance .
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the programmed speed,
which is still displayed, flashes.
Returning to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional
deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of the
programmed speed.
On a steep descent or in the event of
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter
will not be able to prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the programmed
speed.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- do not fit one mat on top of another.
Exiting the speed limiter mode
Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the speed
limiter mode is deselected. It disappears
from the screen.
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the speed limiter,
the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the
dashes.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
225
Driving
Cruise control
System which automatically maintains the
speed of the vehicle at the value programmed
by the driver, without any action on the
accelerator pedal.
The functions of this system are grouped
together on the steering mounted controls.
1. Cruise control mode selection dial.
2. Speed programming/value decrease
button.
3. Speed programming/value increase button.
4. Cruise control off/resume button.
5. Memorised speeds display button.
(see "Memorising speeds")
Steering mounted controls
The cruise control system cannot, in any
circumstances, replace the need to respect speed
limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the driver.
You are advised to keep your feet near the pedals
at all times.
The programmed information is grouped
together in the instrument panel screen.
6. Cruise control off/resume indication.
7. Cruise control mode selection indication.
8. Programmed speed value.
9. Selecting a stored speed.
(see "Storing speeds")
Displays in the instrument panel
Operation
The cruise control is switched on manually: it
requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
(40 km/h) and engagement of:
- fourth gear on the manual gearbox,
- second gear on the electronic gearbox
system or automatic gearbox, in sequential
driving mode,
- position A on the electronic gearbox
system or D on an automatic gearbox.
The cruise control is switched off manually
or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or
on triggering of the ESP system for safety
reasons.
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed
temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal.
To return to the programmed speed, simply
release the accelerator pedal.
Switching off the ignition cancels any
programmed speed value.
Programming
Turn dial 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the
cruise control mode is selected but is not
switched on (Pause).
Set the programmed speed by accelerating
to the required speed, then press button 2
or 3 (e.g.: 70 mph (110 km/h)); the cruise
control system is activated (ON).
You can then change the programmed speed using buttons 2 and 3 :
- by + or - 1 mph (km/h) = short press,
- in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h) = maintained press.
If storing speeds is available and activated on your vehicle, the
programmed speed will stop at the closest stored speed; refer to the
corresponding section.
Stop the cruise control system by pressing button 4 : this is
confirmed in the screen (Pause).
Switch on the cruise control again with another press on button 4 .
Exceeding the programmed speed
Intentional or unintentional exceeding of the programmed speed results in
flashing of this speed in the screen.
Return to the programmed speed, by means of intentional or unintentional
deceleration of the vehicle, automatically cancels the flashing of the speed.
Exiting cruise control mode
Turn dial 1 to the "0" position: the cruise control mode is deselected.
It disappears from the screen.
Operating fault
In the event of a cruise control malfunction,
the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the
dashes.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
When the cruise control is switched on,
be careful if you maintain the pressure
on one of the programmed speed changing
buttons: this may result in a very rapid
change in the speed of your vehicle.
Do not use the cruise control on slippery
roads or in heavy traffic.
On a steep descent, the cruise control will
not be able to prevent the vehicle from
exceeding the programmed speed.
On steep climbs or when towing, the
programmed speed may not be reached or
maintained.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is positioned
correctly,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
227
Driving
Parking space sensors
System which measures the parking space
available between two vehicles or obstacles.
It measures the size of the space and gives you
information on:
- the possibility of fitting into a free space,
depending on the dimensions of your
vehicle and the distances needed for
manoeuvring,
- the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre to
be performed.
The system does not measure spaces which
are clearly much smaller or larger than the size
of the vehicle.
Displays in the instrument panel
You have identified a parking space:
Press button A to select the function.
Operate the direction indicator on the
side where the space is to be measured;
a message is displayed to confirm that
measurement is in progress.
During measurement, go forward the
length of the space, at a speed less than
12 mph (approx. 20 km/h), to prepare for
your manoeuvre.
Once the measurement has been
completed, the system informs you of
the level of difficulty of the manoeuvre
by a message in the multifunction screen
accompanied by an audible signal.
Operation
The parking space sensor function
warning lamp can have two different
states:
- on fixed: the function is selected by a
press on control A .
- off: the function is not selected,
The function displays the following types of message:
The function deselects itself automatically:
- when you engage reverse gear,
- when you switch off the ignition,
- if measuring is not requested,
- within five minutes of selection of the
function,
- if the vehicle speed exceeds the
threshold of 45 mph (approx. 70 km/h) for
one minute.
If the lateral distance between your vehicle and
the parking space is too large, the system may
not be able to measure the space.
The system remains available after each
measurement and can therefore measure
several spaces in succession.
In poor or wintry weather, ensure that the
sensors are free of dirt, ice or snow.
The parking space sensor system deactivates
the front parking sensors when measuring
forwards.
Parking possible
Parking difficult
Parking not advised
If there is a fault, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
229
Driving
Parking sensors
This system indicates the proximity of an
obstacle (person, vehicle, tree, gate, etc.)
which comes within the field of detection of
sensors located in the bumper.
Certain types of obstacle (stake, roadworks
cone, etc.) detected initially will no longer be
detected at the end of the manoeuvre due to
the presence of blind spots.
This function cannot, in any
circumstances, take the place of the
vigilance and responsibility of the
driver.
The system is switched on by engaging reverse
gear. This is accompanied by an audible signal.
The system is switched off when you exit
reverse gear.
Rear parking sensors
Audible assistance
The proximity information is given by an
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which
increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle.
The sound emitted by the speaker (right or left)
indicates the side on which the obstacle is located.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle becomes less than approximately
thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous.
Visual assistance
This supplements the audible signal by
displaying bars in the multifunction screen
which move progressively nearer to the vehicle.
When the obstacle is near, the "Danger"
symbol is displayed in the screen.
Front parking sensors Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of
the system, when reverse gear
is engaged this warning lamp
is displayed in the instrument panel and/or a
message appears in the screen, accompanied
by an audible signal (short beep).
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In addition to the rear parking sensors, the
front parking sensors are triggered when an
obstacle is detected in front and the speed of
the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h).
The front parking sensors are interrupted if
the vehicle stops for more than three seconds
in forward gear, if no further obstacles are
detected or when the speed of the vehicle
exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
The function will be deactivated
automatically if a trailer is being towed
or a bicycle carrier is fitted (vehicle
fitted with a towbar or bicycle carrier
recommended by CITROËN).
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered with
mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is
engaged, an audible signal (long beep)
indicates that the sensors may be dirty.
Certain sound sources (motorcycle,
lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger
the audible signals of the parking
sensor system.
Deactivation/Activation of the
front and rear parking sensors
The function is deactivated by pressing this button.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Pressing this button again reactivates the function.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
The sound emitted by the speaker
(front or rear) indicates whether the
obstacle is in front or behind.
231
Driving
010
Checks
TOTAL & CITROËN
Partners in performance and
protecting the environment
Innovation in the search for
performance
For over 40 year, the TOTAL Research and
Development departments have developed for
CITROËN, lubricants to match the latest technical
innovations on CITROËN vehicles, both for
competition and for everyday motoring.
For you, this is an assurance that you will obtain of
the best performance for your engine.
Optimum protection for
your engine
By having your CITROËN vehicle
serviced with TOTAL lubricants, you
are contributing towards improving the
life and performances of your engine,
while also protecting the environment.
prefers
235
Checks
Bonnet
Opening
Open the front left door.
Pull the interior bonnet release lever A ,
located at the bottom of the door aperture.
Push the exterior safety catch B to the left
and raise the bonnet.
Unclip the stay C from its housing on the
back of the bonnet.
Fix the stay in the notch to hold the bonnet
open.
The location of the interior bonnet
release lever prevents opening of
the bonnet while the front left door is
closed.
Do not open the bonnet in high winds.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns).
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, switch off the Stop & Start
system to avoid any risk of injury
resulting from an automatic change to
START mode.
Closing
Take the stay out of the support notch.
Clip the stay in its housing on the back of
the bonnet.
Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
of its travel.
Pull on the bonnet to check that it is
secured correctly.
Running out of fuel
(Diesel)
On vehicle fitted with HDi engines, the fuel
system must be primed if you run out of fuel;
refer to the corresponding engine compartment
view.
1.6 litre HDi engine
Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
diesel.
Open the bonnet.
If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump.
Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there
may be resistance at the first press).
Operate the starter until the engine starts
(if the engine does not start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
trying again).
If the engine does not start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again
then start the engine.
Clip the styling cover back in place.
Close the bonnet.
If the tank on your vehicle is fitted with
a misfuel prevention device, refer to the
"Misfuel prevention (Diesel)" section.
2 litre HDi engine
Fill the fuel tank with at least five litres of
Diesel.
Open the bonnet.
If necessary, unclip the style cover for
access to the priming pump.
Slacken the bleed screw.
Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until fuel appears in the
transparent pipe.
Tighten the bleed screw.
Operate the starter until the engine starts
(if the engine fails to start at the first
attempt, wait around 15 seconds before
trying again).
If the engine fails to start after a few
attempts, operate the priming pump again,
then the starter.
Put the style cover back in position and
clip it in place, ensuring that it has clipped
correctly.
Close the bonnet.
If the engine does not start first
time, don't keep trying but start the
procedure again from the beginning.
237
Checks
Petrol engines
The various caps and covers allow access for
checking the levels of the various fluids and for
replacing certain components.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
3. Coolant reservoir.
4. Brake fluid reservoir.
5. Battery/Fuses.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.
Diesel engines
The various caps and covers allow access for
checking the levels of the various fluids, for
replacing certain components and for priming
the fuel system.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir.
3. Coolant reservoir.
4. Brake fluid reservoir.
5. Battery/Fuses.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air filter.
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil filler cap.
10. Priming pump * .
11. Bleed screw * .
* According to engine.
239
Checks
Checking levels
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the maintenance and warranty guide. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Oil level
Engine oil change
Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide
for details of the interval for this operation.
In order to maintain the reliability of the engine
and emission control system, the use of
additives in the engine oil is prohibited.
Oil specifi cation
The oil must be the correct grade for your
engine and conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Brake fluid level
Changing the fl uid
Refer to the maintenance and warranty guide
for details of the interval for this operation.
Fluid specifi cation
The brake fluid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The brake fluid level should be close
to the "MAX" mark. If it is not, check
the brake pad wear.
The check is carried out either when
the ignition is switched on using the
oil level indicator in the instrument
panel, or using the dipstick.
It will only be correct if the vehicle is on level
ground and the engine has been off for more
than 30 minutes.
Take care when working under the
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine
may be extremely hot (risk of burns)
and the cooling fan could start at any
time (even with the ignition off).
It is normal to top up the oil level
between two services (or oil changes).
CITROËN recommends that you check
the level, and top up if necessary, every
3 000 miles (5 000 kms).
After topping up the oil, the check when
switching on the ignition with the oil
level indicator in the instrument panel
is not valid during the 30 minutes after
topping up.
Coolant level
The coolant level should be close
to the "MAX" mark but should never
exceed it.
When the engine is warm, the
temperature of the coolant is regulated by the
fan.
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour after
switching off the engine before carrying out any
work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap
by two turns to allow the pressure to drop.
When the pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top up the level.
Fluid specifi cation
The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Power steering fluid level
The power steering fluid level should
be close to the "MAX" mark. With
the engine cold, unscrew the cap to
check the level.
To check the level or top up the
fluid on vehicle fitted with headlamp
washers, immobilise the vehicle and
switch of the engine.
Screenwash / headlamp
wash fluid level
The cooling fan may start after
switching off the engine: take care
with articles and clothing that might
become caught by the fan blades.
241
Checks
Additive level (Diesel with
particle emissions filter)
Topping up
The reservoir must be topped up without delay
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to
health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Take used oil to a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop (France) or to an
authorised waste disposal site.
Open the bonnet and secure it with the
stay.
Open the screenwash reservoir filler cap.
Take and pinch the level gauge to block its
breather.
Remove the gauge completely from
the reservoir to read the level in the
transparent section.
Top up if necessary.
Refit the filler cap to the reservoir and
close the bonnet.
Specifi cation of the fl uid
To ensure optimum cleaning and to avoid
freezing, the fluid should never be topped up or
replaced by plain water.
In wintry conditions, the use of a fluid
with an ethyl alcohol or methanol base is
recommended.
According to your version of instrument panel,
the additive reservoir low level is indicated by:
-
fixed illumination of the particle
emissions filter warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible signal and
a message that the particle emissions
filter additive level is too low,
or
- fixed illumination of the service
warning lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal and a message
that the particle emissions filter
additive level is too low.
Checks
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Oil filter
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the maintenance and warranty guide and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Refer to the maintenance and
warranty guide for details of the
replacement intervals for these
components.
Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty
atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city
driving), replace them twice as often if necessary .
A clogged passenger compartment filter may have
an adverse effect on the performance of the air
conditioning system and generate undesirable
odours.
Replace the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Refer to the maintenance and
warranty guide for details of the
replacement interval for this
component.
The presence of this label, in particular
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
the use of a specific 12 V lead-acid
battery with special technology and
specification. The involvement of
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop is essential when replacing
or disconnecting the battery.
12 V battery
The battery does not require any
maintenance.
However, check that the terminals
are clean and correctly tightened,
particularly in summer and winter.
When carrying out work on the battery, refer
to the "12 V battery" section for details of the
precautions to be taken before disconnecting
the battery and following its reconnection.
243
Checks
Particle emission filter (Diesel)
On a new vehicle, the first operations of
regeneration of the particle emissions
filter may be accompanied by the smell
of "burning", which is perfectly normal.
Following prolonged operation of the
vehicle at very low speed or at idle,
you may, in exceptional circumstances,
notice the emission of water vapour at
the exhaust on acceleration. This does
not affect the behaviour of the vehicle
or the environment.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the maintenance and
warranty guide for the details of the
level checking interval for this component.
According to your version of instrument panel, the start of
saturation of the particle emissions filter is indicated by:
Electronic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the maintenance and
warranty guide for details of the
checking interval for this component.
-
temporary illumination of the service
warning lamp, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message that
there is a risk of blockage of the
particle emissions filter.
-
fixed illumination of the particle
emissions filter warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message that there is a risk of
blockage of the particle emissions filter,
or
As soon as the traffic conditions permit,
regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at
least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp
goes off.
If the warning lamp stays on, refer to the
"Additive level" section.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Refer to the maintenance and
warranty guide for details of the level
checking interval for this component.
Electric parking brake
This system does not require any
routine servicing. However, in the
event of a problem, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Only use products recommended by
CITROËN or products of equivalent
quality and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
units as important as those in the
braking system, CITROËN selects and
offers very specific products.
After washing the vehicle, dampness,
or in wintry conditions, ice can form
on the brake discs and pads: braking
efficiency may be reduced. Make light
brake applications to dry and defrost
the brakes.
Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake
disc wear, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Manual parking brake
If a loss of effectiveness of this
system is noticed, the parking brake
must be checked, even between two
services.
Checking this system must be done by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style
of driving, particularly in the case
of vehicles used in town, over short
distances. It may be necessary to
have the condition of the brakes checked, even
between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in
the brake fluid level indicates that the brake
pads are worn.
For more information, refer to the "Electric
parking brake - Operating faults" section.
245
Checks
011
Practical information
Temporary puncture repair kit
Complete system consisting of a compressor
and a sealant cartridge which permits
temporary repair of a tyre so that you can
drive to the nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures which
could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread
or shoulder.
Access to the kit
The speed limit sticker I must be affixed
to the vehicle's steering wheel to
remind you that a wheel is in temporary
use.
Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) when driving with a tyre
repaired using this type of kit.
Description of the kit
A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector.
B. On "I" / off "O" switch.
C. Deflation button.
D. Pressure gauge (in bar and p.s.i.).
E. Compartment housing:
- a cable with adaptor for 12 V socket,
- various inflation adaptors for
accessories, such as balls, bicycle
tyres...
F. Sealant cartridge.
G. White pipe with cap for repair.
H. Black pipe for inflation.
I. Speed limit sticker.
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the
boot floor.
249
Practical information
1. Sealing
Uncoil the white pipe G fully.
Unscrew the cap from the white pipe.
Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyre to be repaired.
Repair procedure
Avoid removing any foreign bodies
which have penetrated into the tyre.
Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running.
Switch off the ignition.
Take care, this product is harmful
(e.g. ethylene-glycol, colophony...) if
swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
Turn the selector A to the
"sealant" position.
Check that the switch B is in
position "O" .
The vehicle's electric system allows the
connection of a compressor for long
enough to inflate a tyre after a puncture
repair or for inflating a small inflatable
accessory.
Switch on the compressor by moving
the switch B to position "I" until the tyre
pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
The sealant is injected into the tyre under
pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from
the valve during this operation (risk of
splashing).
Remove the kit and screw the cap back on
the white pipe.
Take care to avoid staining your vehicle
with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
Drive immediately for approximately three
miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed
(between 15 and 35 mph (20 and
60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit.
Do not start the compressor before
connecting the white pipe to the tyre
valve: the sealant product would be
expelled through the pipe.
Tyre under-infl ation detection
If the vehicle is fitted with tyre under-
inflation detection, the under-inflation
warning lamp will remain on after the
wheel has been repaired until the
system is reinitialised by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
251
Practical information
2. Infl ation
Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I" ; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C ), in accordance with the vehicle's
tyre pressure label (located on the left
hand door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that the
puncture has not been fully plugged;
contact a CITROËN dealer or qualified
workshop for assistance.
Remove and stow the kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) limiting the distance travelled to
approximately 120 miles (200 km).
Turn the selector A to the "air"
position.
Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel.
Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle again and leave the
engine running.
As soon as possible, go to a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
You must inform the technician that you
have used this kit. After inspection, the
technician will advise you on whether
the tyre can be repaired or if it must be
replaced.
Removing the cartridge
Stow the black pipe.
Detach the angled base from the white pipe.
Support the compressor vertically.
Unscrew the cartridge from the bottom.
Checking tyre pressures /
inflating accessories
Beware of discharges of fluid.
The expiry date of the fluid is indicated
on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is designed for
single use; even if only partly used, it
must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the cartridge
into the environment, take it to an
authorised waste disposal site or a
CITROËN dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new sealant
cartridge, available from CITROËN
dealers or from a qualified workshop.
You can also use the compressor, without
injecting any product, to:
- check or adjust the pressure of your tyres,
- inflate other accessories (balls, bicycle
tyres...).
Connect the compressor's electrical
connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
Start the vehicle and let the engine run.
Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I" ; to
deflate: switch B in position "O" and press
button C ), according to the vehicle's tyre
pressure label or the accessory's pressure
label.
Remove the kit then stow it.
Turn the selector A to the "Air"
position.
Uncoil the black pipe H fully.
Connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel or accessory.
If necessary, fit one of the adaptors
supplied with the kit first.
253
Practical information
Changing a wheel
Procedure for changing a faulty wheel for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
The tools are installed in the boot under the
floor.
To gain access to them:
open the boot,
raise the floor,
secure it by hooking its cord on the hook
on the rear shelf support,
with a standard size spare wheel, unclip
and remove the box in the middle of the
wheel containing the tools,
or
with a "space-saver" spare wheel; lift the
wheel at the rear towards you for access to
the storage box containing the tools.
Access to the tools
List of tools
All of these tools are specific to your vehicle.
Do not use them for other purposes.
Wheel with trim
When removing the wheel , detach the
trim first using the wheelbrace 1 pulling
at the valve passage hole.
When refitting the wheel , refit the trim
starting by placing its notch facing the
valve and press around its edge with
the palm of your hand.
3. "Bolt cover" tool.
For removing the bolt protectors (covers)
on alloy wheels.
4. Socket for the security bolts (located in the
glove box).
For adapting the wheelbrace to the special
"security" bolts.
1. Wheelbrace.
For removing the wheel trim and the wheel
fixing bolts.
2. Jack with integral handle.
For raising the vehicle.
The spare wheel is installed in the boot under
the floor.
Depending on version, the spare wheel may be
a standard size steel or alloy wheel, or for some
countries it is the "space saver" type.
For access to the spare wheel, refer to the
paragraph "Access to the tools" on the previous
page.
Access to the spare wheel
Tyre under-infl ation detection
The spare wheel is not fitted with a
sensor. The punctured wheel must
be repaired by a CITROËN dealer or
aqualified workshop.
Taking out the standard wheel
Unscrew the yellow central bolt.
Raise the spare wheel towards you from
the rear.
Take the wheel out of the boot.
If your vehicle has an electric parking
brake, only a space saver wheel can be
stowed in the boot.
255
Practical information
Putting the standard wheel back
in place
Put the box back in place in the centre of
the wheel and clip it.
Put the wheel back in its housing.
Unscrew the yellow central bolt by a few
turns then put it in place in the centre of the
wheel.
Tighten fully until the central bolt clicks to
retain the wheel correctly.
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does
not block traffic: the ground must be
level, stable and non-slippery ground.
Apply the parking brake unless it has
been programmed to automatic mode,
switch off the ignition and engage first
gear * to lock the wheels.
Check that the braking warning lamps
in the instrument panel are on (not
flashing).
The occupants must get out of the
vehicle and wait where they are safe.
If necessary, place a chock under the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be changed.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised
using a jack; use an axle stand.
List of operations
Remove the chromed bolt cover from each
of the bolts using the tool 3 (according to
equipment).
Fit the security socket 4 on the
wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt.
Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
* position R for an electronic gearbox; P for an
automatic gearbox.
257
Practical information
Place the jack 2 in contact with one of the
two front A or rear B locations provided on
the underbody, whichever is closest to the
wheel to be changed.
Extend the jack 2 until its base plate is in
contact with the ground. Ensure that the
centreline of the jack base plate is directly
below the location A or B used.
Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground
to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel
easily.
Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
Remove the wheel.
Fitting a wheel
Fitting a steel or "space-
saver" spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy
wheels, when tightening the bolts on
fitting it is normal to notice that the
washers do not come into contact with
the steel or "space-saver" spare wheel.
The wheel is secured by the conical
contact of each bolt.
List of operations
Put the wheel in place on the hub.
Screw in the bolts by hand to the stop.
Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security
socket 4 .
Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
After changing a wheel
To store the punctured wheel in the
boot correctly, first remove the central
cover.
When using the "space-saver" type
spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Have the tightening of the bolts and the
pressure of the spare wheel checked
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop without delay.
Have the punctured wheel repaired and
replace it on the vehicle as soon as
possible.
259
Practical information
Lower the vehicle fully.
Fold the jack 2 and detach it.
Tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security
socket 4 .
Tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 only.
Refit the chromed bolt covers on each of
the bolts (according to equipment).
Store the tools in the box.
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only
to the front wheels. They must never
be fitted to "space-saver" type spare
wheels.
For more information on snow chains, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Advice on installation
If you have to fit the chains during a
journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface
on the side of the road.
Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks to prevent movement of your
vehicle.
Fit the chains following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Stop your vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
Avoid driving on roads that have been
cleared of snow, to avoid damaging
your vehicle's tyres and the road
surface. It is recommended that before
you leave, you practise fitting the snow
chains on a level and dry surface. If
your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels,
check that no part of the chain or its
fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
Take account of the legislation in force
in your country on the use of snow
chains and the maximum running
speed authorised.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size Maximum link size.
215/60 R16
9 mm 215/55 R17
225/45 R18
225/40 R19
cannot be fitted with chains
261
Practical information
Changing a bulb
The headlamps are fitted with
polycarbonate glass with a protective
coating:
do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
use a sponge and soapy water or a
pH neutral product,
when using a high pressure
washer on persistent marks, do not
keep the lance directed towards
the lamps or their edges for too
long, so as not to damage their
protective coating and seals.
Changing a bulb should only be done
after the headlamp has been switched
off for a few minutes (risk of serious
burns).
Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth.
It is imperative to use only anti-
ultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid
damaging the headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a
new bulb with the same type and
specification.
Risk of electrocution
Xenon bulbs (D1S-35W) must be
replaced by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Bulbs with lugs, type H1, H7... take care
to position them correctly to ensure the
best lighting.
Model with xenon and directional
headlamps
1. Directional dipped/main beam
headlamps (D1S-35W).
2. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
3. Daytime running lamps (P21/5W XL).
4. Sidelamps (LEDs).
5. Foglamps (H11-55W).
Model with halogen headlamps
1. Direction indicators (H21 clear).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W).
3. Main beam headlamps (H1-55W).
4. Daytime running lamps (P21/5W XL).
5. Sidelamps (LEDs).
6. Foglamps (H11-55W).
Access to bulbs
Depending on the engine and only on the left
hand side, you must first carry out the following
operations for access to the protective covers
on the bulbs.
Remove the air deflector by unclipping
each of its three attachment points.
Unclip the bonnet release cable at its two
fixings.
Move the cable down.
After changing the failed bulb, remember to
put everything back in place (cable and air
deflector).
Front lamps
263
Practical information
Changing dipped beam headlamp
bulbs (only on models with
halogen headlamps)
Remove the protective cover by pulling on
the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Spread the springs to release the bulb.
Extract the bulb and change it.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Changing direction indicator
bulbs
When refitting, close the protective
cover carefully to preserve the sealing
of the headlamp.
Amber coloured bulbs, such as the
direction indicators, must be replaced
with bulbs of identical specifications
and colour.
Rapid flashing of the direction indicator
warning lamp (right or left) indicates the
failure of a bulb on that side.
Model with Xenon headlamps
Remove the protective cover by pulling on
its tongue.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
Separate the springs to release the bulb.
Pull the bulb out and replace it.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Model with halogen headlamps
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
extract it.
Pull out the bulb and change it.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Changing daytime running lamp
bulbs
Remove the protective cover by pulling on
the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
extract it.
Pull the bulb and change it.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Changing main beam headlamp
bulbs (only on models with
halogen headlamps)
Remove the protective cover by pulling on
the tab.
Disconnect the bulb connector.
Squeeze the springs to release the bulb.
Pull out the bulb and replace it.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Changing integrated direction
indicator side repeaters
Insert a screwdriver towards the centre of
the repeater between the repeater and the
base of the mirror.
Tilt the screwdriver to extract the repeater
and remove it.
Disconnect the repeater connector.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain replacement repeaters.
265
Practical information
Changing the side spotlamps
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Changing the LED lamps/sidelamps
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Changing foglamp bulbs
Introduce a flat screwdriver in the hole in
the finisher.
Pull and lever to unclip the bumper finisher
(the parking sensor stays with the finisher).
Remove the two module fixing screws and
remove it from its housing.
Disconnect the bulb holder connector.
Turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn and
extract it.
Pull the bulb and change it.
To refit, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
To replace these bulbs you may also contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
1. Brake lamps (P21/5W).
2. Sidelamps (LEDs).
3. Direction indicators (PY21W amber)
4. Reversing lamp (P21W).
5. Rear foglamps (P21W).
Rear lamps
Amber bulbs, such as those for the
direction indicators, must be replaced
by bulbs of the same rating and colour.
The lamps on the tailgate, other than
the guide lamps, are dummy units.
They are there for aesthetic
purposes only.
Changing stop lamp, reversing lamp and direction indicator bulbs
These three bulbs are changed from inside the boot:
open the boot,
remove the access grille from the
corresponding side trim panel,
slacken the two nuts using a 10 mm tube
spanner then remove the nuts by hand,
unclip the lamp unit connector,
extract the lamp unit carefully pulling in its
middle towards the outside,
remove the foam seal,
unclip the two small secondary connectors,
spread the two tabs and remove the bulb
holder,
turn the bulb a quarter of a turn and
change it.
To reassemble, carry out these operations in
reverse order.
Take care to engage the lamp unit in its guides,
while keeping it in line with the vehicle.
Tighten sufficiently to ensure sealing, but
without damaging the lamp.
267
Practical information
Changing the LED lamps/sidelamps
Number plate lamps (W5W) Third brake lamp (LEDs)
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
To facilitate the removal of the lamp, carry out
this operation with the tailgate half open.
Insert a thin screwdriver into the lens
cutout.
Push it outwards.
Remove the lens.
Change the faulty bulb.
To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.
Changing a fuse
The extraction tweezer is fitted to a carrier
clipped to the dashboard fusebox cover.
For access to it:
open the glove box lid,
unclip the carrier on the fusebox cover by
pulling on the right
remove the tweezer,
Access to the tools
open the fusebox cover by pulling at top
right,
fold down completely the fusebox cover.
Changing foglamp bulbs
These bulbs are replaced from outside the rear
bumper:
pass your hand under the bumper,
turn the bulb holder a quarter turn and remove it,
turn the bulb a quarter turn, pull it out and fit a
new bulb.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse
order.
Take care not to touch the silencer;
there is a risk of burns if changing a
bulb within a few minutes of switching
off the ignition.
269
Practical information
Installing electrical
accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing other electrical
equipment or accessories on your
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
CITROËN will not accept responsibility
for the cost incurred in repairing your
vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions
resulting from the installation of
accessories not supplied and not
recommended by CITROËN and
not installed in accordance with its
instructions, in particular when the
combined consumption of all of the
additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
Before changing a fuse:
the cause of the failure must be identified
and rectified,
all electrical consumers must b switched
off,
the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignition off,
identify the failed fuse using the tables and
layout drawings in the following pages.
Changing a fuse
Good Failed
The replacement of a fuse not shown in
the tables below may cause a serious
malfunction of your vehicle. Contact
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Tweezer
To replace a fuse, you must:
use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of
its filament,
always replace the failed fuse with a fuse
of the same rating (same colour); using a
different rating could cause faults (risk of
fire).
If the fuse fails again soon after replacement,
have the vehicle's electrical system checked by
a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Dashboard fuses
The fuseboxes are located in the lower
dashboard (left-hand side).
Access to the fuses
Refer to the paragraph "Access to the
tools".
271
Practical information
Fusebox 1
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F8 3 A Alarm siren, alarm ECU.
F13 10 A Cigarette lighter.
F14 10 A 12 V socket in boot.
F16 3 A
Lighting for the large multifunctional storage unit, rear map
reading lamps, glove box illumination.
F17 3 A Sun visor illumination, front map reading lamps.
F28 15 A Audio system, radio (after-market).
F30 20 A Rear wiper.
F32 10 A Hi-Fi amplifier.
Fusebox 2
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F36 15 A Rear 12 V socket.
F37 - Not used.
F38 - Not used.
F39 - Not used.
F40 - Not used.
Fuse tables
The fusebox is placed in the engine
compartment near the battery (left-hand side).
Access to the fuses
Unclip the cover.
Change the fuse (see corresponding
paragraph).
When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure sealing of the fusebox.
Engine compartment fuses
273
Practical information
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F19 30 A Windscreen wipers slow / fast speed.
F20 15 A Front and rear screenwash pump.
F21 20 A Headlamp wash pump.
F22 15 A Horn.
F23 15 A Right-hand main beam headlamp.
F24 15 A Left-hand main beam headlamp.
F27 5 A Left-hand dipped headlamp.
F28 5 A Right-hand dipped headlamp.
Fuse table
12 V battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
For access to the (+) terminal:
release the bonnet using the interior lever,
then the exterior safety catch,
raise the bonnet and secure it with its stay,
lift the plastic cover for access to the (+)
terminal.
Access to the battery
After refitting the battery, the Stop &
Start system will only be active after a
continuous period of immobilisation of the
vehicle, a period which depends on the
climatic conditions and the state of charge
of the battery (up to about 8 hours).
The presence of this label, in particular
with the Stop & Start system, indicates
the use of a 12 V lead-acid battery with
special technology and specification;
the involvement of a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop is essential
when replacing or disconnecting the
battery.
Before doing any work
Immobilise the vehicle: apply the
parking brake, put the gearbox in
neutral, then switch off the ignition.
Check that all electrical equipment is
switched off.
Procedure for starting the engine using another
battery or charging a discharged battery.
275
Practical information
Connect the red cable to the positive
terminal (+) of the flat battery A , then to the
positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B .
Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the negative terminal (-) of the
slave battery B (or earth point on the other
vehicle).
Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to the earth point C on the broken
down vehicle (or on the engine mounting).
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
good battery and leave it running for a
few minutes.
Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run .
If the engine does not start straight away,
switch off the ignition and wait a few
moments before trying again.
Wait until the engine returns to idle then
disconnect the jump lead cables in the
reverse order.
Starting using another
battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be started using a slave battery
(external or on another vehicle) and jump lead
cables.
First check that the slave battery has a
nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to that of the discharged
battery.
Do not try to start the engine by
connecting a battery charger.
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when
the engine is running.
Before disconnecting the battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off the ignition
before disconnecting the battery.
Close the windows and the doors before
disconnecting the battery.
Charging the battery using
a battery charger
Disconnect the battery from the vehicle.
Follow the instructions for use provided by
the manufacturer of the charger.
Connect the battery starting with the
negative terminal (-).
Check that the terminals and connectors
are clean. If they are covered with sulphate
(whitish or greenish deposit), remove them
and clean them.
With Stop & Start, the battery does not
have to be disconnected for charging.
Reinitialisation after
reconnection
After any reconnection of the battery, switch on
the ignition and wait at least one minute before
starting, to allow time for the initialisation of the
electronic systems.
By referring to the corresponding sections, you
should set or initialise the following systems
yourself:
- one-touch electric windows,
- time and date,
- audio and navigation system settings.
Check that no alert message or
warning lamp comes on after switching
on the ignition.
However, if minor problems persist
after carrying out these operations,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Position the open clamp E of the cable on
the positive post (+) of the battery.
Press down on the clamp to position it
correctly on the battery post.
Lock the clamp by lowering the lever D .
Reconnecting the (+)
terminal
Disconnecting the (+)
terminal
Raise the lever D fully to release the clamp E .
Do not force the lever as locking will not
be possible if the clamp is not positioned
correctly; start the procedure again.
277
Practical information
Some functions are not available if the
battery is not sufficiently charged.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be
carried out in a well ventilated area and
away from naked flames and sources
of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of
explosion or fire.
Do not try to charge a frozen battery;
the battery must first be thawed out to
avoid the risk of explosion. If the battery
has been frozen, before charging have
it checked by a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop who will check
that the internal components have not
been damaged and the casing is not
cracked, which could cause a leak of
toxic and corrosive acid.
Do not reverse the polarity and use
only a 12 V charger.
Do not disconnect the terminals while
the engine is running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals first.
Wash your hands afterwards.
It is advisable to disconnect the battery
if the vehicle is to be left unused for
more than one month.
The batteries contain harmful substances
such as sulphuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must not, in any
circumstances, be discarded with household
waste.
Take used remote control batteries and
vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
engine if you have an electronic or
automatic gearbox.
Energy economy mode
System which manages the period of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of
charge in the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio equipment, windscreen
wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined period of thirty
minutes.
This period may be greatly reduced if
the battery is not fully charged.
A flat battery prevents the engine from
starting (refer to the corresponding
paragraph).
If the telephone is being used at the
same time on the navigation system,
it will be interrupted after 10 minutes.
Switching to economy mode
Once this period has elapsed, a message
appears in the screen indicating that the
vehicle has switched to economy mode and the
active functions are put on standby.
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically
the next time the vehicle is driven.
In order to resume the use of these
functions immediately, start the engine and
let it run for a few minutes.
The time available to you will then be double
the period for which the engine is left running.
However, this period will always be between
five and thirty minutes.
Load reduction mode
System which manages the use of certain
functions according to the level of charge
remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as the air conditioning,
the heated rear screen...
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automatically as soon as conditions permit.
279
Practical information
Changing a wiper blade
Before removing a front
wiper blade
Within one minute after switching off
the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to
position the wiper blades vertically on the
windscreen.
Removing
Raise the corresponding wiper arm.
Unclip the wiper blade and remove it.
Fitting
Put the corresponding new wiper blade in
place and clip it.
Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
After fitting a front wiper
blade
Switch on the ignition.
Operate the wiper stalk again to park the
wiper blades.
Very cold climate screen *
Fitting
Offer up the very cold climate screen to
the front of the lower section of the front
bumper.
Press around its edge to engage its fixing
clips one by one.
Removal
Use a screwdriver as a lever to release
each fixing clip in turn.
* According to country.
Do not forget to remove the very cold climate
screen when:
-
the ambient temperature exceeds 10 °C,
-
towing,
-
driving at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
Removable protective screen which prevents
the accumulation of snow at the radiator
cooling fan.
Fitting roof bars
For safety reasons and to avoid damaging the
roof, it is essential to use the transverse bars
approved for your vehicle.
When fitting roof bars, use only the four fixing
points located in the roof frame. The points are
masked by the vehicle doors when closed.
Remove the protective covers, levering them
off with a screwdriver. Take care not to scratch
the paint.
The roof bar fixings include a stud to be fitted to
the hole at each fixing point.
Observe the fitting instructions and the
conditions of use in the guide supplied with
the bars.
Keep the protective covers safe so that they
can be refitted after removing the roof bars.
Maximum authorised weight on the roof
rack, for a loading height not exceeding
40 cm (with the exception of bicycle
carriers): 80 kg .
As this value is subject to change,
check the maximum load figure given in
the guide provide d with the roof bars.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars
and the fixings on the vehicle.
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects which are longer
than the vehicle.
281
Practical information
Towing the vehicle
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
The towing eye is installed in the boot under
the floor.
To gain access to it:
open the boot,
raise the floor,
secure it by hooking its cord on the hook on
the rear parcel shelf support,
remove the towing eye from the holder.
Access to the tools
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your
country.
Ensure that the weight of the towing
vehicle is higher than that of the towed
vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel
of the towed vehicle and must have a
valid driving licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground, always use an
approved towing bar; rope and straps
are prohibited.
When towing a vehicle with the engine
off, there is no longer any power
assistance for braking or steering.
In the following cases, you must always call
on a professional recovery service:
- vehicle broken down on a motorway or
fast road,
- 4 wheel drive vehicle,
- when it is not possible to put the gearbox
into neutral, unlock the steering, or
release the parking brake,
- towing with only two wheels on the
ground,
- where there is no approved towing bar
available...
On the front bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
On the rear bumper, unclip the cover by
pressing at the bottom.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Install the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
Towing your vehicle Towing another vehicle
Place the gear lever in neutral
(position N on an electronic or
automatic gearbox).
Failure to observe this instruction
could result in damage to
certain components (braking,
transmission...) and the absence
of braking assistance the next time
the engine is started.
Unlock the steering by turning the key
in the ignition one notch and release the
parking brake.
Switch on the hazard warning lamps on
both vehicles.
Move off gently, drive slowly and for a short
distance.
283
Practical information
Towing a trailer
Towbar suitable for the attachment of a trailer or installation of a bicycle carrier, with additional
lighting and signalling.
We recommend the use of genuine
CITROËN towbars and their harnesses
that have been tested and approved
from the design stage of your vehicle,
and that the fitting of the towbar is
entrusted to a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If the towbar is not fitted by a CITROËN
dealer, it is imperative that it is
fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Your vehicle is primarily designed for
transporting people and luggage, but it may
also be used for towing a trailer.
Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and the
driver must take particular care.
Driving advice
Distribution of loads
Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle and the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. Above
1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must
be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of
altitude.
Side wind
Take into account the increased sensitivity
to side wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the
temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling
capacity is not dependent on the engine speed.
To lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed.
The maximum towed load on a long incline
depends on the gradient and the ambient
temperature.
In all cases, keep a check on the coolant
temperature.
If the warning lamp and the STOP
warning lamp come on, stop the
vehicle and switch off the engine
as soon as possible.
The rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically if a genuine
CITROËN towbar is used.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance.
To avoid overheating of the brakes on a long
mountain type of descent, the use of engine
braking is recommended.
Tyres
Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
Check the electrical lighting and signalling
on the trailer.
Refer to the "Technical data" section for
details of the weights and towed loads
which apply to your vehicle.
285
Practical information
Accessories
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the CITROËN dealer network.
These accessories and parts have been tested and approved for reliability and safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle and benefit from CITROËN's recommendation and warranty.
"Comfort":
door deflectors, side window blinds, rear
screen blind, isotherm module, coat hanger
fixed to head restraint, mobile reading lamp,
mirror for caravan, scented ar freshener and
cartridges, parking sensors...
"Transport systems":
child seats and booster cushions, boot carpet,
boot liner, boot net, boot spacers, transverse
roof bars, bicycle carrier, ski carrier, roof boxes,
DS roof boxes, towbars, wiring harnesses...
"Styling":
gear lever knobs, aluminium foot rest, alloy
wheels, chrome mirror shells...
"Security and safety":
anti-intrusion alarm, anti-tilt unit, stolen
vehicle tracking system, child seats and
booster cushions, breathalyser, first aid kit, fire
extinguisher, dog guard, pet seat belt, warning
triangle, high visibility vest, wheel security
bolts, snow chains, non-slip covers...
If a towbar and wiring harness are fitted
outside the CITROËN dealer network,
the installation must be done following
the manufacturer's recommendations.
* To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
- ensure that mats are correctly positioned
and secured,
- never fit one mat on top of another.
"Protection":
mats * , seat covers compatible with lateral
airbags, mud flaps, door protective mouldings,
bumper protection strips, vehicle cover,
protective covers for pets...
Conversion kits
You can obtain an "Enterprise" kit to convert a
trade vehicle to a private car and vice-versa.
"Multimedia":
audio systems, steering mounted audio
controls, speakers, Hi-Fi module, Bluetooth
hands-free system, portable satellite navigation
system, semi-integral support bracket for
portable navigation system, mapping update
CD, driving assistant, portable video screen,
portable video support bracket,
230 V/50 Hz socket, 230 V/12 V adaptor,
iPhone
®
compatible mobile phone charger,
mobile phone/smartphone bracket, Wi-Fi on
board...
By visiting a CITROËN dealer you can also
obtain cleaning and maintenance products
(interior and exterior) - including ecological
products in the "TECHNATURE" range,
products for topping up (screenwash...), paint
touch-up pens and aerosols for the exact
colour of your vehicle, refills (sealant cartridge
for the temporary puncture repair kit...), ...
Installation of radio
communication
transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio
communication transmitter, you can
contact a CITROËN dealer for the
specification of transmitters which can
be fitted (frequency, maximum power,
aerial position, specific installation
requirements), in line with the Vehicle
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive
(2004/104/EC).
The fitting of electrical equipment
or accessories which are not
recommended by CITROËN may result
in a failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excessive electrical
consumption.
Please note this precaution. You
are advised to contact a CITROËN
representative to be shown the range
of recommended equipment and
accessories.
Depending on the legislation in force
in the country, it may be compulsory
to have a high visibility safety vest,
warning triangle, breathalyzers and
spare bulbs and fuses available in the
vehicle.
287
Practical information
012
Technical data
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
NX...
5FS0 5FV8/P 5FMA 5FU8
PETROL ENGINES VTi 120 THP 155 THP 160 THP 200
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 598 1 598 1 598 1 598
Bore x stroke (mm) 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8
Max power * : EU standard (kW) 88 115 120 147
Max power engine speed (rpm) 6 000 6 000 6 000 5 500
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 160 240 240 275
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 4 250 1 400 1 400 1 700
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Unleaded
Catalytic converter yes yes yes yes
GEARBOX
Manual
(5-speed)
Electronic gearbox system
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement) 4.2 4.2 4.2 4.2
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
291
Technical data
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Petrol engines VTi 120 THP 155 THP 160 THP 200
Gearboxes Manual Electronic Automatic Manual
Model codes:
NX...
5FS0 5FV8/P 5FMA 5FU8
- Unladen weight 1 205 1 284 1 363 1 316
- Kerb weight 1 280 1 359 1 438 1 391
- Gross vehicle weight
(GVW)
1 755 1 795 1 835 1 820
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
2 955 3 195 2 635 2 820
- Braked trailer (within the GTW limit)
on a 12 % gradient
1 200 1 400 800 1 000
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer within the
GTW limit)
1 450 1 650 1 000 1 250
- Unbraked trailer 640 680 715 695
- Recommended nose weight 75 75 75 75
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount. Warning:
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
NX...
9HP0
9HR8
9HR8/S
9HR8/PS RHH8 RHHA
DIESEL ENGINES HDi 90 PEF HDi 110 PEF HDi 160 PEF
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 85 x 88
Max power * : EU standard (kW) 68 82 120
Max power engine speed (rpm) 4 000 3 600 4 000
Max torque: EU standard (Nm) 230 270 340
Max torque engine speed (rpm) 1 750 1 750 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter yes yes
Yes
Particle emissions filter (PEF) yes yes Yes
GEARBOX
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Electronic
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Automatic
(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with filter replacement) 3.75 3.75 3.75 -
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type-approved on a test bed, under conditions defined in European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
.../S: e-HDi model fitted with Stop & Start.
293
Technical data
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (in kg)
Diesel engines HDi 90 PEF HDi 110 PEF e-HDi 110 PEF HDi 160 PEF
Gearbox Manual Manual Manual Electronic Manual Automatic
Model codes:
NX...
9HP0 9HR8 9HR8/S 9HR8/PS RHH8 RHHA
- Unladen weight 1 205 1 290 1 295 1 300 1 320 1 430
- Kerb weight 1 280 1 365 1 370 1 375 1 395 1 505
- Gross vehicle weight
(GVW)
1 765 1 805 1 810 1 815 1 880 1 940
- Gross train weight (GTW)
on a 12 % gradient
2 865 3 105 3 110 3 115 3 180 3 140
- Braked trailer (within GTW limit)
on 12 % gradient
1 100 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 200
- Braked trailer * (with load transfer with
the GTW limit)
1 350 1 550 1 550 1 550 1 550 1 450
- Unbraked trailer 640 680 680 680 695 750
- Recommended nose weight 75 75 75 75 75 75
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for
each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) (comply with the legislation in force in your country).
High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C,
limit the towed load.
* The weight of the braked trailer can be increased, within the GTW limit, if the GVW of the towing vehicle is reduced by an equal amount. Warning:
towing using a lightly loaded towing vehicle may have an adverse effect on its road holding.
Dimensions (in mm)
295
Technical data
Identifi cation markings
Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.
A. Vehicle identification number (VIN)
under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the bodywork near
the suspension damper mounting.
B.
Vehicle identification number on the dashboard.
This number is indicated on a self-adhesive
label which is visible through the windscreen.
D. Tyre/paint label.
This label is affixed to the driver's front pillar.
Low tyre pressures increase fuel
consumption.
The tyre pressures must be checked
when the tyres are cold, at least once
a month.
C. Manufacturer's label.
The VIN is indicated on a self-destroying label
affixed to the driver's centre pillar.
It bears the following information:
- the tyre pressures, for unladen and laden
conditions,
- the tyre sizes (including the load index and
speed rating),
- the spare tyre inflation pressure,
- the paint colour code.
013
Audio and telematics
299
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL
CITROËN Localised Emergency Call
In an emergency, press this button for more than
2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice
message confi rm that the call has been made to the
CITROËN Localised Emergency Call centre * .
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the call. The green LED
goes off.
Pressing this button (at any time) for more than 8 seconds cancels
the call.
CITROËN Localised Assistance Call
When the ignition is switched on, the green
LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that
the system is operating correctly.
If the orange LED fl ashes: there is a
system fault.
If the orange LED is on continuously: the
backup battery must be replaced.
In either case, contact a CITROËN dealer.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request.
The cancellation is confi rmed by a voice message.
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request
assistance if the vehicle breaks down.
A voice message confi rms that the call has been made * .
Operation of the system
The green LED remains on (without fl ashing) when communication is
established. It goes off at the end of communication.
This call is dealt with by the CITROËN Localised Emergency Call centre
which receives locating information from the vehicle and can send a
detailed alert to the appropriate emergency services. In countries in
which the team is not operational, or when the locating service has
been expressly declined, the call is dealt with directly by the emergency
services (112) without the vehicle location.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and
independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call
is made automatically.
* These services are subject to conditions and availability.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the CITROËN dealer network,
we invite you to have a dealer check the confi guration of these services
and, if desired, modifi ed to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country,
confi guration is possible in the offi cial national language of your choice.
For technical reasons, particularly to improve the quality of Telematic
services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out
updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.
If you benefi t from the CITROËN eTouch offer, you also have available
additional services in your MyCITROËN personal space, via the CITROËN
Internet website in your country, accessible on www.citroen.com.
301
The system is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle.
eMyWay
01 First steps - Control panel
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while
the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the system switches off
following the activation of the energy economy mode.
CONTENTS
02 Steering mounted controls
03 General operation
04 Navigation - Guidance
05 Traffic information
06 Using the telephone
07 Radio
08 Music media players
09 Audio settings
10 Configuration
11 Screen menu map
Frequently asked questions
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
304
306
307
309
322
325
335
339
345
346
347
351
SATELLITE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
MULTIMEDIA BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE AUDIO SYSTEM
01
FIRST STEPS
Access to the
" Navigation - guidance "
menu and display the
recent destinations.
Rotary control knob:
Short press without the engine running: on / off.
Short press with the engine running: audio
source off / restore.
Rotation: volume adjustment (each source
is independent, including TA messages and
navigation instructions).
Continuous press:
reinitialisation of the system.
Short press: select pre-set
radio station.
Long press: pre-set the
current station.
MODE button: Selection of the
type of permanent display.
Long press: black screen
(DARK).
Open the
" Telephone " menu
and display the list of
recent calls or accept
an incoming call.
Open the
" Confi guration " menu.
Long press: access
to the GPS coverage
and the navigation
demonstration mode.
Open the " Traffi c
information " menu
and display the
current traffi c alerts.
01
303
Select:
- the next lower / higher radio frequency automatically.
- the previous / next CD track, MP3 track or media.
- the left / right of the screen when a menu is displayed.
Move left / right in " Move the map " mode.
Abandon the current
operation, up one level in
the menu.
Long press: return to the
permanent display.
Access to the " RADIO " menu and display
the list of stations received.
Long press: display the audio settings
screen for the radio tuner source.
Long press: open the " Audio settings " menu: music ambience, bass, treble, loudness, left/
right balance, front/rear fader, automatic volume adjustment.
Access to the " MUSIC " menu, and display of
the CD/MP3/Apple
®
tracks and folders.
Long press: display the audio settings screen
for the " MEDIA (CD/USB/iPod/Streaming/
AUX)" sources.
Selection and OK confi rmation knob:
Selection of an item on the screen or in a list or a
menu, then confi rmation with a short press.
Other than for menus and lists, a short press
displays a contextual menu depending on the
current screen.
Rotation with map displayed: zoom the map scale
in and out.
Select:
- the previous/next line in a list or menu.
- the previous / next media folder.
- step by step selection of the previous/next radio frequency.
- the previous / next MP3 folder.
Move up/down, in " Move the map " mode.
FIRST STEPS
02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
- Change the audio source.
Long press: mute.
- Volume increase.
- Volume decrease.
- Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
- Rotation
Radio -automatic selection of
next / previous frequency.
Media: previous / next track.
- Press then rotation: access to
6 preset stations.
- TEL button:
Access to the telephone menu:
Call list / Contacts / Hands-free
mode / Answer / Hang up.
Accept an incoming call.
Long press: reject an incoming call
or end the current call.
- Move in the menus.
Zoom the map in and out
Press: confi rmation
- Abandon the current operation.
03
305
For the details of the menus, refer to the "Screen menu map"
section.
For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.
" RADIO "
" TELEPHONE "
(If conversation in progress)
SETUP : PARAMETERS
date and time, display confi guration, sound, vehicle
settings.
Changing the audio source:
RADIO : RADIO broadcasts.
MUSIC : playing MUSIC.
Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following displays:
GENERAL OPERATION
" FULL SCREEN MAP "
" MAP IN WINDOW "
(If navigation guidance in
progress)
03
A press on the knob gives access
to short-cut menus according to the
display in the screen.
GENERAL OPERATION
Display according to context
RADIO:
Activate / Deactivate TA
Activate / Deactivate RDS
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS,
CD or USB (according to
media):
Play modes:
Normal
Random
Random on all media
Repetition
TELEPHONE (call in
progress):
Private mode
FULL SCREEN MAP OR
IN A NEW WINDOW:
Stop / Restore guidance
Select destination
Enter an address
Directory
GPS coordinates
Divert route
Move the map
Info. on location
Select as destination
Select as stage
Save this place (contacts)
Quit map mode
Guidance criteria
Put call on hold
DTMF ring tones
Hang up
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Change waveband
FM
AM
2
2
1
TA
1
04
307
List of recent destinations.
" Navigation - guidance "
To delete the list of recent destinations, select " Guidance
options " in the navigation menu then select " Delete last
destinations " and confi rm. Select " Yes " then confi rm.
Deleting just one destination is not possible.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
" Select destination "
" Journey leg and route "
" Guidance options "
" Map management "
" Stop / Restore guidance "
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Access to the "Navigation" menu
Press NAV .
or
To make full use of all of the
functions of your navigation
system, update the mapping
regularly. Contact a
CITROËN dealer or order
your mapping update at
http://citroen.navigation.com
A short press on the end of the
lighting control stalk repeats
the last navigation message.
04
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
Towards a new destination
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Selecting a destination
Select " Select destination " and
confi rm, then select " Enter an address "
and confi rm.
Select the " Country " function then
confi rm.
Select the " Town " or " Post code "
function then confi rm.
Select the letters in the name of the
town or the characters in a post code
one at a time, confi rming each one with
the knob.
Selection the town from the list offered,
then confi rm
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few
letters) of the towns in the country
selected can be accessed directly by
selecting and confi rming " List " in the
screen.
If possible, enter the " Road " and " N°/X "
information in the same way.
Select " Archive " to save the address entered in a contact fi le.
The system allows up to 400 contact fi les to be recorded.
Confi rm " OK " to start guidance.
Select the guidance criteria: " Fastest
route ", " Shortest route " or optimised
" Distance/Time ", then select the
desired restriction criteria: " With tolls ",
" With Ferry ", or " Traffi c info " then
confi
rm " OK ".
04
309
Towards a recent destination
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
Select the desired destination and
confi rm to start guidance.
Towards a contact in the contacts directory
Select " Select destination " and
confi rm, then select " Directory " and
confi rm.
Selection the desired destination from
your contacts and confi rm " OK " to start
the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
Navigation towards a contact is only possible if it has an address
entered in the audio navigation system.
Delete recent destinations
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
Select " Options " and confi rm and then
" Delete recent destinations " and
confi rm.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
04
Select " Select destination " and
confi rm, then select " GPS coordinates "
and confi rm.
Enter the GPS coordinates and confi rm
" OK " to start the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Towards GPS coordinates
Towards a point on the map
With the map displayed, press OK to
display the contextual menu. Select
" Move the map " and confi rm.
Press OK to display the contextual
menu for " Move the map " mode.
Select " Select as destination " or
" Select as stage " and confi rm.
Move the cursor using the control to
identify the desired destination.
04
311
Towards points of interest (POI)
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity
(hotels, various businesses, airports...).
Select the " Enter an address " function
and confi rm, then select Select
destination and confi rm.
To select a POI close to your current
location, select " POI " and confi rm, then
select " Around the current place " and
confi rm.
To select a POI as a stage on the route,
select " POI " and confi rm, then select
" On the route " and confi rm.
To select a POI as a destination, fi rst
enter the country and town (see "Towards
a new destination"), select " POI " and
confi rm, fi nally select " Near " and confi rm.
Search for POIs in the categories
suggested in the following pages.
Select " Search by Name " to search for POIs by name and not by
proximity.
Select the POI and confi rm " OK " to start
the guidance.
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
This icon appears when several POIs are grouped
together in the same area. Zooming in on this icon
shows details of the POIs.
Service station
Garage
CITROËN
Covered car park
Car park
Rest area
Hotel
Restaurant
Cafeteria
Bed and breakfast
Railway station
Bus station
Port
Industrial estate
Supermarket
Vending machine
Sports complex, sports centre,
sports ground
Swimming pool
Winter sports resort
Airport
Theme parks
Hospital, Chemist, Vet
Police station
Town hall
Post offi ce
Museum, Culture, Theatre,
Historic monument
Tourist information, Tourist
attraction
Risk areas / Danger areas *
List of principal points of interest (POI)
*
According to availability in the country.
School
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you.
You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month.
The detailed procedure is available on:
http://citroen.navigation.com.
Cinema
04
313
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Select:
- "Visual alert"
- "Audible alert"
- "Alert only in guidance"
- "Overspeed alarm only".
The choice of time of notifi cation defi nes
how long in advance that Risk area
warnings are given.
Select " OK " to confi rm the screen.
Select " Guidance options " and confi rm,
then select " Set parameters for risk
areas " and confi rm.
Press NAV to display the " Navigation -
guidance " menu.
These functions are only available if risk areas have been
downloaded and installed on the system.
The detailed procedure for updating risk area POIs can be found at
http://citroen.navigation.com.
Settings for risk area / danger area alerts
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Adding a stage
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
Select " Journey leg and route " then
confi rm.
Select " Close to " a route passing
close to the stage or " Strict " for a route
passing through the stage.
Confi rm " OK " to start the guidance, and
give a general indication of the guidance
route.
Select " Add a stage " then confi rm .
The address of the stage is entered as
a destination, by " Enter an address ",
a contact in " Directory ", or " Previous
destinations ".
Organising stages
To organise stages, carry out
operations 1 to 2 again, then select
" Order/delete journey legs " and
confi rm.
Select and confi rm to save the
modifi cations.
Select the stage that you want to move
in the order.
Select " Delete " to delete the stage.
04
315
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Route options
Calculation criteria
Select " Guidance options " and confi rm.
Select " OK " and confi rm to save the
modifi cations.
Select " Defi ne calculation criteria " and
confi rm.
This function allows modifi cation of:
- the guidance criteria: (" Fastest
route ", " Shortest route ",
" Distance/Time "),
- the exclusion criteria: (" With tolls "
or " With Ferry "),
- traffi c avoidance: (" Traffi c info ").
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
If traffi c avoidance (Traffi c info) is selected, the system suggests
an alternative route if there is a delay on the guidance route.
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
Map management
Selecting the points of interest displayed on the map
Select " Map management " and confi rm.
Select from the various categories the
ones that you want to display on the
screen.
Select " Map details " and confi rm.
Select " Default " to have only " Filling stations, garages " and
" Risk areas " appear on the map (if installed in the system).
Select " OK " then confi rm and select
" OK " again then confi rm to save the
modifi cations.
04
317
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Select " Map management " and confi rm.
Select:
- " Vehicle direction " to have the map
follow the direction of travel,
- " North direction " to keep the map
always North up,
- " Perspective view " to display a
perspective view.
Select " Map orientation " and confi rm.
The colour of the map, different from the day and night mode, is
confi gured in the " SETUP " menu.
Map orientation
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
Street names are visible on the map from the 100 m scale.
04 NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Press NAV to display the
" Navigation - guidance " menu.
Navigation voice synthesis
Select " Guidance options " and confi rm.
Adjusting the volume / Deactivation
Select " Set speech synthesis " and
confi rm.
Select the volume graph and confi rm.
Select " Deactivate " to deactivate voice messages.
Select " OK " and press the dial to
confi rm.
Adjust the volume to the desired level
and confi rm.
The volume of messages can be adjusted during the transmission
of the message using the volume adjustment control.
The volume setting of guidance messages is also accessible via
the " SETUP " / " Voice synthesis " menu.
04
319
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Male voice / Female voice
Press SETUP to display the
confi guration menu.
Select " Select male voice " or " Select
female voice " then confi rm " Yes " to
activate a male or female voice. The
system restarts.
Select " Voice synthesis " and confi rm.
05
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Access to the "Traffic information" menu
List of TMC messages in order
of distance from the vehicle.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
" Traffi c information "
" Geographic fi lter "
" Select TMC station "
(automatic, manual)
" Display/Do not display
messages "
or
Press " TRAFFIC ".
05
321
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Configure the filtering and display of TMC messages
TMC (Traffi c Message Channel) messages contain information on traffi c and weather conditions, received in real time and transmitted to the
driver in the form of audible announcements and symbols on the navigation map.
The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traffi c problem.
Press the TRAFFIC button to display the
" Traffi c information " menu.
Select the " Geographic fi lter " function
and confi rm.
The system offers a choice of:
- " Retain all the messages ",
or
- " Retain the messages "
" Around the vehicle ", (confi rm the
mileage to modify and select the
distance),
" On the route ".
Confi rm " OK " to save the modifi cations.
We recommend:
- a fi lter on the route and
- a fi lter around the vehicle of:
- 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas,
- 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
05 TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Principal TMC symbols
Red and yellow triangle: traffi c information, for example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
Weather reports
Modifi ed signage
Risk of explosion
Traffi c reports
Narrow carriageway
Road closed
Wind
Slippery surface
Demonstration
Fog
Accident
Danger
Parking
Delay
No entry
Snow / ice
Roadworks
Traffi c jam
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c report
is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
Press RADIO to display the " FM / AM
band " menu.
Select " Guidance options " then
confi rm.
Activate or deactivate " TA " then confi rm.
The volume setting for TA messages can be adjusted only during the
transmission of this type of alert.
Activate or deactivate the function at any time by pressing
the button.
During a message, press the button to interrupt it.
06
323
USING THE TELEPHONE
Access to the "Telephone" menu
" Telephone "
" Dial "
" Directory of contacts "
"Contacts management "
" Phone functions "
" Bluetooth functions "
" Hang up "
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
List of recent calls sent and
received with the telephone
connected to the system.
Press PHONE .
To make a call, select a number in the list and confi rm " OK "
to start the call.
Connecting a different telephone deletes the list of
recent calls.
No telephone connected.
Telephone connected.
Incoming call.
Outgoing call.
Synchronisation of
address book in progress.
Telephone call in
progress.
In the top bar of the permanent
display
06
Pairing a Bluetooth telephone
First connection
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio unit must be
carried out with the vehicle stationary .
In the Bluetooth menu of your telephone, select
the name of the system from the list of devices
detected.
Press this button.
Select " Bluetooth functions " and
confi rm.
Select " Peripherals search " and
confi rm.
The list of peripheral devices detected
is displayed. Wait until the " Connect "
button is available.
USING THE TELEPHONE
You can check the compatibility of your telephone at
www.citroen.co.uk (services).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function
and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone
confi guration).
Quick procedure from the telephone
Enter a minimum 4 fi gure code in the telephone and
confi rm.
Enter the same code in the system,
select " OK " and confi rm.
Procedure from the system
06
325
Select " Connect " and confi rm.
The system offers to connect the
telephone:
- in " Hands-free mode " (telephone
only),
- in " Audio " mode (streaming: playing
music fi les on the telephone),
- or " All " (for selection of both
modes).
Select " OK " and confi rm.
Then accept automatic connection on the telephone to allow the
telephone to reconnect automatically every time the vehicle is
started.
The ability of the system to connect in only one mode depends on
the telephone. The two modes may both connect by default.
USING THE TELEPHONE
The " Hands-free mode " should be used in preference if
"Streaming" is not desired.
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone
manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.
Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to
accept or not the transfer of your contacts.
On return to the vehicle, the last telephone connected
automatically reconnects, within around 30 seconds after
switching on the ignition (Bluetooth activated and visible).
To modify the automatic connection mode, remove the pairing
and pair the telephone again with the desired mode.
Enter a minimum 4 fi gure code in the telephone
and confi rm.
Enter the same code in the system,
select " OK " and confi rm.
Select the name of the desired
peripheral from the list of devices
detected then confi rm
06 USING THE TELEPHONE
Directory configuration / Synchronisation with the telephone
Press PHONE then select " Contacts
management " and confi rm.
Select " New contact " to enter a new
contact.
Select " Delete all contacts " to delete
the contacts saved in the system.
Select " Import all the entries " to import
all the contacts in the telephone and
save them in the system.
Once imported, a contact remains visible
whatever telephone is connected.
Select " Synchronization options ":
- No synchronization: only the
contacts saved in the system
(always present).
- Display telephone contacts: only the
contacts saved in the telephone.
- Display SIM card contacts: only the
contacts saved on the SIM card.
- Display all phone contacts:
contacts on the SIM card and in the
telephone.
Select " Contact mem. status " to see the
number of contacts saved in the system
or imported, and the free memory.
Select " Sort by Name/First name " to
choose the order in which they appear.
06
327
Editing, importing or deleting a contact
Press PHONE then select " Directory of
contacts " and confi rm.
Select the desired contact and confi rm.
Select " Import " to copy a contact from
the telephone to the system.
Select " Delete " to delete a contact
recorded in the system.
Select OK or press the back button to exit
this menu.
Once the contact has been imported, the Bluetooth symbol
disappears, replaced by the telephone symbol which shows that the
contact has been saved in the system.
USING THE TELEPHONE
It is not possible to modify or delete contacts in the telephone or the
SIM card via the Bluetooth connection.
Select " Open " to view a contact on the
telephone or modify a contact saved in
the system.
In the " Directory of contacts " menu, the import and deletion of
contacts is done one by one.
06 USING THE TELEPHONE
Press PHONE twice.
Select " Dial " then confi rm.
Select " Directory of contacts " then
confi rm.
Dial the telephone number using the
virtual keypad selecting each number
in turn.
Confi rm " OK " to make the call.
Press TEL or twice on PHONE .
Calling a new number
Calling a contact
Select the desired contact and confi rm.
If access was via the PHONE button,
select " Call " and confi rm.
Select the number and confi rm to start
the call.
Making a call
Use of the telephone is not recommended while driving. We
recommended that you park safely or make use of the steering
mounted controls.
06
329
USING THE TELEPHONE
Calling a recently entered number
Press TEL , select " Call list " and
confi rm,
Select the desired number and confi rm.
To erase the calls log, press PHONE twice, select " Phone
functions " and confi rm then select " Delete calls log " and
confi rm.
Ending a call
Press PHONE then select " OK " to end
the call.
Or make a long press on TEL at the
steering mounted controls.
Or make two short presses on TEL at
the steering mounted controls.
Or press the MODE button, as many
times as necessary, until the telephone
screen is displayed.
press PHONE to display the calls log.
or
Press " OK " to display the contextual
menu then select " Hang up " and
confi rm.
It is always possible to start a call directly from the telephone;
park the vehicle as a safety measure.
06 USING THE TELEPHONE
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
on the screen.
"Yes " to accept the call is selected by
default.
Press " OK " to accept the call.
Select " No " and confi rm to reject the
call.
A short press on TEL accepts an
incoming call.
A long press on TEL rejects an incoming
call.
06
331
USING THE TELEPHONE
Options during a call *
During a call, press the MODE button
several times to select display of the
telephone screen, then press " OK " to
open the contextual menu.
Select " Private mode " and confi rm to
take the call on the handset.
Or select " Hands-free mode " and
confi rm to take the call via the vehicle's
speakers.
Select " Put call on hold " and confi rm to
put the current call on hold.
Or select " Resume the call " and
confi rm to resume the call on hold.
Select " DTMF ring tones " to use the
numerical keypad, so as to navigate
through the menu of an interactive vocal
server.
Select " Hang up " to end the call.
* Depending on the compatibility of the phone and your service plan.
it is possible to hold a 3-way conference
call by making 2 calls in succession*.
Select " Conference mode call " in the
contextual menu accessible using this
button.
Or make a short press on this button.
06
Press PHONE twice.
Select " List of the paired peripherals "
and confi rm.
It is possible to:
- " Connect " or " Disconnect " the
selected telephone,
- delete the pairing of the selected
telephone.
It is also possible to select all pairings.
USING THE TELEPHONE
Managing paired telephones
Changing the ringtone
Press PHONE twice.
Select " Phone functions " and confi rm.
Select " Ring options " and confi rm.
You can adjust the volume and the type
of ringtone.
Select " Bluetooth functions ".
Select " OK " and confi rm to save the
changes.
07
333
RADIO
Access to the "RADIO" menu
" FM / AM band / DAB "
" Change waveband "
(" AM / FM / DAB ")
" Guidance options " (" TA, RDS,
FM alternative frequencies /
DAB ")
" Audio settings " (see this section)
" Update radio list "
Alphabetical list of stations
received.
Press or or use the rotary control to select the
previous or next station in the list.
This list can also be displayed by pressing LIST on the
steering mounted controls.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
A long press on LIST refreshes
the list of stations received.
Press RADIO .
07 RADIO
By alphabetical list
Press RADIO or LIST , select the station
of your choice and confi rm.
By automatic frequency search
Press or for the automatic search
for a lower or higher radio frequency.
Or turn the thumb wheel at the steering
mounted controls.
By manual frequency search
Press or to adjust the radio
frequency step by step.
Selecting a station
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with the reception, including in RDS station tracking mode.
This phenomenon is a normal result of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a fault with the audio system.
The quality of reception is represented by the number of
active waves in this symbol.
Press RADIO or OK to display the
contextual menu.
Changing waveband
Select " Change waveband ".
Select " AM / FM " and confi rm.
07
335
Press the button on the numerical
keypad to recall a preset station.
Or press then turn the thumb wheel at
the steering mounted controls.
Presetting a station
After selecting a station, press one of
the buttons on the numerical keypad for
2 seconds to preset the current station.
An audible signal confi rms that the
station has been preset.
Press RADIO .
Activate / Deactivate RDS
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However,
in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be
assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not
cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception
of the station during a journey.
Select " Guidance options " then
confi rm.
Activate or deactivate " RDS " then
confi rm.
RADIO
07 RADIO
Press " RADIO ".
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Digital radio
Digital radio provides a higher quality reception and also the
graphical display of information for the radio station, by selecting
"Video mode" in "Radio favourites" (Options).
The different radio multiplex services offer a choice of stations
displayed in alphabetical order.
Select " Change band " and confi rm.
Selection " DAB " and confi rm.
Digital radio - DAB/FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of the country.
When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you
to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching
to the corresponding analogue "FM" station (if one exists).
Change of station in the same "multiplex".
Manual search for a "multiplex".
Press " RADIO ".
Select " Options " and confi rm.
Select " FM/DAB " and confi rm.
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is on, there will be a difference of a few
seconds in the programme when the system changes to analogue
"FM" radio with sometimes a variation in volume.
Display of the "DAB" band then becomes "DAB (FM)".
When the strength of the digital signal is good again, the system
automatically switches back to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station you are listening to is not available on "FM"
(" DAB/FM " option greyed out), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is not
on, the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.
08
337
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Access to the "MUSIC MEDIA PLAYER" menu
" MEDIA "
" Change Media "
" Eject USB device " (if USB
connected)
" Play mode " (" Normal ",
" Random ", " Random on all
media ", " Repetition ")
" Audio settings " (see this section)
" Activate / Deactivate AUX input "
List of the current media
tracks.
This list can also be displayed by pressing LIST
at the steering mounted controls.
Go from the list to the menu (left/right).
or
Press MUSIC .
08 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3 CD / USB player
The audio equipment will only play audio fi les with ".wma, .aac, .fl ac,
.ogg and .mp3" fi le extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps
and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
WMA fi les must be of the standard wma 9 type.
The sampling rates supported are greater than 32 KHz.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using of
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying
problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format (udf, ...), it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
Information and advice
The system supports USB mass storage or iPod
devices via the USB port (suitable cable not supplied).
If a partitioned USB memory key is connected to the
system, only the fi rst partition is recognised.
Control of the peripheral device is with the audio
system controls.
The number of tracks is limited to 2000 maximum,
999 tracks per folder.
If the current consumption at the USB port exceeds
500 mA, the system goes into protection mode and
deactivates the port.
Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must
be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable
(not supplied).
In order to be read, a USB memory stick must be formatted FAT 16
or 32.
The system does not support the operation of an Apple
®
player and a
USB memory stick connected at the same time.
It is recommended that offi cial Apple
®
USB cables are used to ensure
correct operation.
08
339
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Sources
Insert the CD in the player, insert the USB memory
stick in the USB player or connect the USB
peripheral to the USB port using a suitable cable
(not supplied) .
The system builds playlists (in temporary memory),
an operation which can take from a few seconds to
several minutes at the fi rst connection.
Reduce the number of non-music fi les and the
number of folders to reduce the waiting time.
The playlists are updated every time the ignition is
switched off or connection of a USB memory stick.
However, the system memorises these lists and
if they are not modifi ed, the loading time will be
shorter.
Play starts automatically after a period which
depends on the capacity of the USB memory stick.
Selection of source
The SOURCE button on the steering mounted controls allows a
direct change to the next media source.
" CD / CD MP3 "
" USB, iPod "
" AUX " " STREAMING "
" RADIO "
Press MUSIC to display the " MEDIA "
menu.
Select " Following media source " and
confi rm.
Repeat the operation as many times as necessary to obtain the
desired media source (except for radio which is accessible either
with SOURCE or RADIO ).
08
/
/
//
//
/
/
+/
SELECTING A TRACK
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Previous track.
Next track.
Previous folder.
Next folder.
Fast forward.
Fast backward.
Pause: long press on SRC .
LIST: List of USB or CD tracks or
folders
Up or down in the list.
Confi rm, next menu level.
Up one menu level.
Long press
Long press
08
341
Audio streaming
Streaming allows audio fi les on your telephone to be played via the
vehicle's speakers.
Connect the telephone: see " USING THE TELEPHONE ".
Select " Audio " or " All " profi le.
If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the
audio playback from the telephone.
Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system
buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered
to be a media source.
It is recommended that you activate " Repeat " on the Bluetooth
peripheral.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
Connecting APPLE
®
players
Connect the Apple
®
player to the USB port using a suitable cable
(not supplied).
Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifi cations available are those of the portable device
connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks /
podcasts).
The default classifi cation used is by artist. To modify the classifi cation
used, return to the fi rst level of the menu then select the desired
classifi cation (playlists for example) and confi rm to go down through
the menu to the desired track.
The "Shuffl e tracks" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random"
mode on the audio system.
The "Shuffl e albums" mode on an iPod
®
corresponds to the "Random
all" on the audio system.
"Shuffl e tracks" is restored by default on each connection.
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible
with the generation of your Apple
®
player.
08 MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)
JACK/RCA AUDIO CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
Connect the portable device (MP3, WMA player…) to the RCA audio
sockets (white and red) using a JACK-RCA audio cable.
Press MUSIC to display the " MUSIC "
menu.
Select " Activate / Deactivate AUX
input " and confi rm.
First adjust the volume of your portable
device (to a high level). Then adjust the
volume of your audio system.
Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
09
343
AUDIO SETTINGS
They are accessible by the MUSIC
button in the control panel or by a long
press on RADIO according to the source
in use.
- " Equalizer " (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
- " Bass "
- " Treble "
- " Loudness " (Activate/Deactivate)
- " Distribution " (" Driver ", " All passengers ")
- " Le-Ri balance " (Left/Right)
- " Fr-Re balance " (Front/Rear)
- " Auto. Volume " depending on road speed (Activate/Deactivate)
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys
©
system) of
sound is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted
to the number of listeners in the vehicle.
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound Staging.
With Sound Staging, the driver and passengers are immersed in an
"audio scene" recreating the natural atmosphere of an auditorium:
truly a part of the scene and its surroundings.
This new sensation is made possible by software in the audio system
which processes the digital signals from the media players (radio,
CD, MP3…) without changing the audio settings. This processing
takes account of the characteristics of the passenger compartment to
produce optimum results.
The Arkamys
©
software installed in your audio system processes
the digital signal from the media players (radio, CD, MP3, ...) and
recreates a natural musical scene, with harmonious placement of
instruments and voices in the space in front of passengers, level with
the windscreen.
The audio settings ( Equalizer , Bass , Treble and Loudness ) are
different and independent for each sound source.
The settings for distribution and balance are common to all sources.
10 CONFIGURATION
Press SETUP to display the
" Confi guration " menu.
Select " Choose colour " and confi rm to
select the screen colour harmony and
the map presentation mode:
- day mode,
- night mode,
- automatic day/night mode,
according to whether the
headlamps are on.
Select " Adjust luminosity " and confi rm
to adjust the screen brightness.
Press " OK " to save the changes.
The settings for day and night are
independent.
Select " Display confi guration " and
confi rm.
Display configuration
11
345
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
"NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE"
MENU
Enter an address
Select destination
Directory
GPS coordinates
Journey leg and route
Add a stage
Enter an address
Directory
Previous destinations
Order/delete journey legs
Divert route
Chosen destination
Guidance options
Defi ne calculation criteria
Delete last destinations
Map management
Map orientation
MAIN FUNCTION
Option A1
Option A11
Option A
Option B...
Map details
Move the map
Mapping and updating
Description of risk areas database
Stop / Restore guidance
1
2
3
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
1
3
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
Set parameters for risk areas
2
Fastest route
2
Shortest route
Distance/Time
With tolls
2
2
2
With Ferry
2
Traffi c info
2
Set speech synthesis
Fastest route
Shortest route
3
3
2
Distance/Time
With tolls
3
3
With Ferry
Traffi c info
3
3
3
3
3
North direction
Vehicle direction
Perspective view
11
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Select TMC station
Automatic TMC
Manual TMC
List of TMC stations
Display / Do not display
messages
"TRAFFIC INFORMATION"
MENU
Geographic filter
Retain all the messages:
Retain the messages:
Around the vehicle
On the route
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
3
3
1
Dial
Directory of contacts
Call
Open
Import
"TELEPHONE" MENU
1
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3
List of the paired peripherals
Connect
Disconnect
Delete
Delete all
Contact mem. status
Phone functions
Ring options
Delete calls log
Bluetooth functions
Peripherals search
Rename radiotelephone
Hang up
Display all phone contacts
Delete
Contacts management
New contact
Delete all contacts
Import all the entries
Synchronization options
Display telephone contacts
No synchronization
Display SIM card contacts
2
Cancel
2
Sort by Name/First name
3
Cancel
11
347
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
1
"MUSIC" MENU
Change Media
Audio settings
Activate / Deactivate AUX
input
All passengers
Le-Ri balance
Fr-Re balance
Auto. Volume
Update radio list
Bass
Treble
Loudness
Distribution
Driver
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
Equalizer
"RADIO" MENU
Change Waveband
Guidance options
TA
RDS options
Audio settings
None
Classical
Jazz
Rock
Techno
Vocal
2
2
2
2
USB/iPod
AUX
CD
BT Streaming
2
FM / DAB / AM
3
Activated / Deactivated
3
Activated / Deactivated
2
2
FM/DAB (auto tracking)
Video mode
11 SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
2
1
2
2
Crystal symphony
Urban rythmik
"SETUP" MENU
Sound choice
Classic
2
Jungle fantasy
* Depending on vehicle equipment.
1
Alert log
2
Guidance instructions volume
1
Speech synthesis setting
2
Select male voice/Select female voice
2
1
2
2
Adjust luminosity
Set date and time
Display configuration
Choose colour
2
Select units
1
Select language
1
Define vehicle parameters *
349
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The route calculation is
not successful.
The guidance criteria may confl ict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a toll motorway).
Check the guidance criteria on the Navigation
Menu, "Guidance options"\ "Defi ne calculation
criteria".
I am unable to enter my
post code.
The system only accepts post codes of up to 5 characters.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected. Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The risk areas audible
warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active. Activate audible warnings in the Guidance options
menu, "Navigation - guidance", "Set parameters
for risk areas".
The system does not
suggest a detour around
an incident on the route.
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages. Select the "Traffi c info" function in the list of
guidance criteria.
I receive a Risk area alert
which is not on my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a
cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for a Risk area
located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of
the Risk area. Select "On the route" to no longer
receive alerts other than guidance or to reduce the
time for the announcement.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Certain traffi c jams
along the route are not
indicated in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
traffi c information.
Wait until the traffi c information is being received
correctly (display of the traffi c information icons on
the map).
The fi lters are too restrictive. Modify the "Geographic fi lter" settings.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
traffi c information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffi c information available.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the SETUP button, then
select "GPS coverage").
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather,
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system
is dependent on the GPS signal reception
conditions.
I am unable to connect
my Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone
may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth
function is switched on.
- Check in the telephone settings that it is
"visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone
on www.citroen.co.uk (services)
The volume of the
telephone connected
in Bluetooth mode is
inaudible.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone. Increase the volume of the audio system, to
maximum if required, and increase the volume of
the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an infl uence on the quality of telephone
communication.
Reduce the ambient noise level (close the windows,
reduce the booster fan speed, slow down, ...).
351
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Some contacts are
duplicated in the list.
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts
on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both
synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display
telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown
in alphabetical order.
Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specifi c order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone
directory.
The system does not
receive SMS text messages.
The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to the
system.
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: refer to the information and advice in the
"MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS" section.
-
The audio system's CD player does not play DVDs.
- Some recorded CDs will not be played by
the audio system because they are not of the
correct quality.
The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the
player (udf, ...).
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio system.
There is a long waiting
period following the insertion
of a CD or connection of a
USB memory stick.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few seconds to a
few minutes.
This phenomenon is normal.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
Some characters in the
media information are not
displayed correctly while
playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters. Use standard characters to name tracks and
folders.
Playing of streaming fi les
does not start.
The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device.
The names of tracks and
the track length are not
displayed on the screen
when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profi le does not allow the transfer of this information.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the
vehicle is travelling.
Activate the "RDS" function by means of the
short-cut menu to enable the system to check
whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the
geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
I cannot fi nd some radio
stations in the list of
stations received.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name
(the title of the song for example).
The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
The name of the radio
station changes.
353
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
In changing the setting
of treble and bass the
equalizer setting is
deselected.
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain
the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer
setting, treble and bass
return to zero.
When changing the
balance settings, the
distribution setting is
deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings.
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance or distribution settings to
obtain the desired musical ambience.
When changing an
distribution setting,
the balance setting is
deselected.
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Volume, Bass, Treble,
Equalizer and Loudness can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings for (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Equalizer, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the
AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Fr-Re balance,
Le-Ri balance) to the middle position, select the
"None", musical ambience and set the loudness
correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or
to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
With the engine off, the
system switches off after
a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time depends on
the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
Playback of my USB
memory stick starts only
after a very long wait
(around 2 to 3 minutes).
Some fi les supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access
to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).
Delete the fi les supplied with the memory stick
and limit the number of sub-folders in the fi le
structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my
iPhone as telephone and
to the USB port at the
same time, I am unable
to play the music fi les.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the
streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB
function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the
track being played with Apple
®
players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port
(the USB function takes priority over streaming).
When I connect my
Apple
®
player or my
BlackBerry
®
to the
USB port, I have alert
messages on the current
consumption by the USB
port.
When charging, the current consumption of these smartphones is greater
than the rating of the USB port, which is 500mA.
355
The system is coded in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle.
AUDIO SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH
01 First steps
For safety reasons, the driver must only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio system may switch
off after a few minutes.
CONTENTS
02 Steering mounted controls
03 Main menu
04 Audio
05 Using the telephone
06 Audio settings
07 Screen menu map
Frequently asked questions
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
p.
356
357
358
359
370
378
379
381
01
Automatic search up/down for radio
frequencies.
Select previous/next CD, USB,
streaming track.
Navigation in a list.
Display the list of stations
received, CD/MP3 tracks or
folders.
Long press: managing the
classifi cation of MP3/WMA
fi les/update the list of stations
received.
Abandon the current
operation.
Up one level (menu or
folder).
On/Off.
Selection of AM / FM /
DAB * wavebands.
Select preset radio station.
Long press: store a station.
Select screen display
between modes:
Full screen: Audio
(or telephone if call in
progress)/
In a window: Audio
(or telephone if call in
progress) - Time or Trip
computer.
Long press: black screen
(DARK).
Audio settings:
audio ambiences, treble,
bass, loudness, distribution,
left/right balance, front/rear
fader, automatic volume.
Access to main menu.
TA (Traffi c
Announcement)
function On/Off.
Long press:
access to type of
information.
Select source:
Radio, CD, AUX, USB,
Streaming.
Accept an incoming
call.
Confi rmation or display of
contextual menu.
Manual step by step search up/down
for radio frequencies.
Select previous/next MP3 folder.
Select previous/next folder/genre/artist/
playlist in the USB device.
Navigation in a list.
Volume adjustment.
FIRST STEPS
* Depending on model.
357
02 STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
- Change the audio source.
Long press: mute.
- Increase volume.
- Decrease volume.
- Radio: display the list of stations.
Media: display the list of tracks.
Long press: update the list of
stations received.
- Rotation:
Radio: search for the previous /
next station.
Media: previous / next track.
Press: confi rmation.
- Access to telephone menu:
Dial / Directory / Calls list / Voice
mail box.
- Move in the menus.
Press: confi rmation.
- Abandon the current operation.
03
" Multimedia ": Media parameters,
Radio parameters.
" Trip computer ": Warning log.
For a detailed global view of the
menus available, refer to "Screen
menu map" section.
" Bluetooth connection ":
Connections management,
Search for a device.
" Telephone ": Call, Directory
management, Telephone
management, Hang up.
MAIN MENU
" Personalisation-confi guration ": Defi ne
the vehicle parameters, Choice of language,
Display confi guration, Choice of units, Date
and time adjustment.
Screen C
359
04 AUDIO
Press SOURCE or SRC several times in
succession and select radio.
Press BAND to select a waveband.
Press LIST to display the list of stations
received in alphabetical order.
A press changes to the next or previous
letter (e.g. A, B, D, F, G, J, K, ...).
Radio
Select the desired radio station and
confi rm by pressing OK .
Selecting a station
A long press on LIST builds or updates
the list of stations; audio reception is cut
momentarily.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below
ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking
mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio
waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.
04
RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station
by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain
conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout
the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This
explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
AUDIO
RDS
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a
radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c
report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD,
USB, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message.
Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the
transmission of the message.
Press TA INFO to activate or deactivate
the reception of traffi c messages.
When the radio is displayed on the
screen, press OK to display the
contextual menu.
Select " RDS " and confi rm to save.
" RDS " is displayed in the screen.
361
04
Make a long press on TA INFO to
display the list of categories.
Receiving INFO messages
The INFO function gives priority to TA alert messages. To be
active, this function needs good reception of a radio station that
transmits this type of message. When a message is transmitted,
the current audio source (Radio, CD, USB, ...) is interrupted
automatically to receive the INFO message. Normal play resumes
at the end of the message transmission.
Select or deselect categories to activate
or deactivate the reception of the
corresponding messages.
AUDIO
Radio text is information transmitted by the radio station related to the
current programme or song.
With the radio displayed on the screen,
press OK to display the contextual
menu.
Select " RadioText (TXT) display " and
confi rm OK to save.
Display RADIO TEXT
Screen C
04 AUDIO
Change band (FM1, FM2, DAB, ...)
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting)
Digital radio
Digital radio provides a superior audio quality and also additional
categories of traffi c announcements (TA INFO).
The different "multiplex services" offer a choice of radio stations in
alphabetical order.
Change of station within the same "multiplex service".
Start a search for the next "multiplex service".
Digital radio - DAB / FM tracking
"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of the country.
When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you
to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching
to the corresponding analogue "FM" station (if it exists).
Long press: select the desired categories of
announcements from Transport, News, Entertainment
and Flash special (availability according to the station).
When the radio station is displayed in the screen, press on " OK " to
display the contextual menu.
(Frequency hopping (RDS), DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText
(TXT) display, Information on the station, ...)
Press the " Menu " button.
Select " Multimedia " and confi rm.
Select " DAB / FM auto tracking " and confi rm
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is on, there will be a difference of a few
seconds in the programme when the system changes to analogue
"FM" radio, with sometimes a variation in volume.
When the strength of the digital signal is good again, the system
automatically switches back to "DAB"
If the "DAB" station you are listening to is not available on "FM"
(" DAB/FM " option barred), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is not on,
the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.
363
04 AUDIO
Audio CD
Insert 12 cm diameter circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
personal recorder, may cause faults which are no refl ection on the
quality of the original player.
Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
begins automatically.
To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE or SRC
button several times in succession and
select " CD ".
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Playing a CD
Press LIST to display the list of tracks
on the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward.
04 AUDIO
CD, USB
Information and advice
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 fi les spread
over 8 directory levels. However, it is recommended that this be kept
to 2 levels so as to limit the time taken to access and play the CD.
During play, the folder structure is not observed.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
Do not connect a hard disk or USB device other than audio players to
the USB port. This may cause damage to your installation.
The audio system will only play fi les with extension ".mp3" or ".wma"
and a compression rate that is constant or variable between 32 Kbps
and 320 Kbps.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using
special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
The playlists accepted are types .m3u and .pls.
The number of fi les is limited to 5 000 in 500 directories on a
maximum of 8 levels.
365
04
CD, USB
AUDIO
Playing a compilation
Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player or
connect a memory stick to the USB port, directly or
via an extension lead.
The system creates playlists (temporary memory) the creation time
for which can take from a few seconds to several minutes.
The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or a
USB memory stick is connected.
Play starts automatically after a period which depends on the
capacity of the USB memory stick.
At a fi rst connection, the order suggested is by folder.
When connecting again, the order previously chosen is
retained.
To play a disc or memory stick which
has already been inserted, press
SOURCE or SRC several times in
succession and select " CD " or " USB ".
Press one of the buttons to select the
next or previous track.
Press one of the buttons to select the
next or previous folder in the order
chosen.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forwards or backwards.
Press LIST to display the menu of
folders in the compilation.
04
Select a line in the list.
Select a track or a folder.
Skip a track.
Up a level in the menu.
AUDIO
USB memory stick - File sorting
Having selected the desired sorting
(" By folders ", " By artists ", " By genres ",
" By playlists ") press OK .
Then confi rm OK to save the modifi cations.
- By folders : all folders containing audio
fi les recognised on the peripheral device,
in alphabetical order without following the
folder structure.
- By artists : all of the artist names defi ned
in the ID3 Tags, in alphabetical order.
- By genres : all of the genres defi ned in the
ID3 Tags.
- By playlists : if playlists have been saved.
Make a long press on LIST or press
MENU , select " Multimedia ", then
" Media parameters " and fi nally " Choice
of track listing " to display the different
types of sorting.
367
04 AUDIO
APPLE
®
players or portable player
Management of the device is via the audio system controls.
The audio fi les on a Mass Storage portable player * can
be heard through the vehicle's speakers by connecting
it to the USB port (cable not supplied).
If the portable player is not recognised by the USB port, connect it to
the auxiliary Jack socket.
The Apple
®
player must be updated regularly for the best connection.
The playlists are those defi ned in the Apple
®
player.
The Apple
®
player must be generation 5 or later.
* Check your player's manual.
04 AUDIO
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Auxiliary Jack socket
Do not connect a device to the USB port and to the auxiliary Jack
socket at the same time.
The auxiliary Jack socket permits the connection of a portable non-
mass storage device or an Apple
®
player if not recognised by the
USB port.
Connect the portable device to the auxiliary Jack socket using a
suitable cable (not supplied).
Press the SOURCE or SRC button
several times in succession and select
" AUX ".
First adjust the volume on your portable device.
Then adjust the volume of the audio
system.
The display and management of controls is on the
portable device.
369
04 AUDIO
Streaming - Playing audio files via
Bluetooth
Depending on the compatibility of the phone
Pair/connect the telephone: see the "USING
THE TELEPHONE" section.
Streaming allows music fi les on a telephone to be heard via the
vehicle's speakers.
The telephone must support the appropriate bluetooth profi les
(Profi les A2DP / AVRCP).
Activate the streaming source by pressing SOURCE or
SRC . Control of playback is via the audio system. The
contextual information can be displayed in the screen.
In certain cases, playing of the audio fi les must be initiated from the
telephone.
The audio quality depends on the quality of the transmission from
the telephone.
Play mode
The play modes available are:
- Normal: the tracks are played in order, depending on the
classifi cation of the selected fi les.
- Random: the tracks in an album or folder are played in a
random order.
- Random all: all of the tracks saved in the media are played in
random order.
- Repeat: the tracks played are only those from the current
album or folder.
Press OK for access to the contextual
menu.
or
Press MENU .
Select " Multimedia " and confi rm.
Select " Media parameters " and
confi rm.
Select " Read mode " and confi rm.
Select the desired play mode and
confi rm OK to save the modifi cations.
05 USING THE TELEPHONE
Pairing a telephone
First connection
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used.
Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to fi nd out which services are available to you.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and
ensure that it is "visible to all" (refer to the telephone
user guide).
Press MENU .
A window is displayed " Search in progress… ".
Select the telephone to be connected
from the list. Only one telephone can
be connected at a time.
Select " Search for a device ".
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile
telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
Visit www.citroen.co.uk for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).
Select " Bluetooth connection " and
confi rm.
371
05
Saisir code authentification
0
1
OK Del
23456789
_
USING THE TELEPHONE
A virtual keypad is displayed on the
screen: enter a code with at least
4 digits and conform with OK .
A message is displayed on the screen of the
telephone: enter the same code and confi rm.
A message appears in the screen to confi rm the result of the
connection.
Pairing can also be initiated from the telephone by searching for
detected Bluetooth devices.
Accept the connection to the telephone.
If pairing fails, try again; the number of attempts is not limited.
The directory and the calls list can be accessed after the
synchronisation period (if the telephone is compatible).
Automatic connection must be confi gured in the telephone to allow
the connection each time the vehicle is started.
In some cases, the reference number of the telephone or the
Bluetooth address may appear instead of the name of the telephone.
Pair/connect the telephone then listen: see the AUDIO section.
Streaming - Playing audio files via
Bluetooth
05 USING THE TELEPHONE
The telephone connection automatically includes hands free operation
and audio streaming.
The ability of the system to connect to just one profi le depends on the
telephone. Both profi les may connect by default.
Press MENU .
Select " Bluetooth connection " and
confi rm.
Indicates connection of the audio steaming profi le.
Managing connections
Select " Connections management "
and confi rm. The list of paired
telephones is displayed.
Select a telephone and confi rm.
Indicates connection of the hands-free profi le.
Then select and confi rm:
- " Connect telephone " / " Disconnect
telephone ": to connect / disconnect
the telephone or the hands-free
connection only.
- " Connect media player " /
" Disconnect media player ": to
connect / disconnect only streaming.
- " Connect telephone + media
player " / " Disconnect telephone +
media player ": to connect /
disconnect the telephone (hands-free
and streaming).
- " Delete connection ": to delete the
pairing.
Indicates that a device is connected.
373
05 USING THE TELEPHONE
To display the " TELEPHONE " menu:
- Make along press on SOURCE or
SRC .
- Or, press OK to display the
contextual menu. Select " Call " and
confi rm.
- Or, press MENU , select
" Telephone " and confi rm. Select
" Call " and confi rm.
Select " Dial " to enter a number and
confi rm.
To display the " TELEPHONE " menu:
- Make a long press on SRC/TEL .
- Or, press the dial to display the
contextual menu. Select " Call " and
confi rm.
- Or, press MENU , select
" Telephone " and confi rm. Select
" Call " and confi rm.
Select OK and confi rm to start the
call.
Select " Calls list " and confi rm.
Making a call - Dialling
Select numbers one at a time using
the and buttons and confi rm.
Making a call - Recently called numbers *
Select the number and confi rm to
start the call.
The calls list includes calls sent and received in the vehicle using the
connected telephone.
* Depending on the compatibility of the telephone.
Correction allows numbers to be deleted one at a time.
It is possible to make a call directly from the telephone; park the
vehicle fi rst as a safety measure.
05 USING THE TELEPHONE
To display the " TELEPHONE " menu:
- Make a long press on SRC/TEL .
- Or, press the dial to display the
contextual menu. Select " Call " and
confi rm.
- Or, press MENU , select
" Telephone " and confi rm. Select
" Call " and confi rm.
Select " Directory " and confi rm.
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
in the multifunction screen.
Mobile
(depending on the information
available in the contact records of
the telephone connected).
" YES " to accept the call is selected by
default.
Press OK to accept the call.
Select " NO " and confi rm to reject the
call.
or
Press one of these buttons to accept
the call.
Making a call - From the directory of contacts
Select a contact then confi rm.
Receiving a call
Select the number and confi rm.
A long press on ESC or on TEL ,
SOURCE or SRC also rejects an
incoming call.
Business
Home
375
05 USING THE TELEPHONE
During a call, press OK to display the
contextual menu.
Hang up
In the contextual menu:
- select " Micro OFF " to switch off the
microphone.
- deselect " Micro OFF " to switch the
microphone on.
Managing calls
A long press on one of these buttons
also ends the call.
In the contextual menu, select
" Hang up " to end the call.
Secret - Mute
(so that the caller cannot hear)
05
In the contextual menu:
- select " Telephone mode " to
transfer the call to the telephone.
- deselect " Telephone mode " to
transfer the call to the vehicle.
In certain cases, the combined mode has to activated from the
telephone.
If the contact has been cut off, when you reconnect on returning to
the vehicle, the Bluetooth connection will be restored automatically
(depending on the compatibility of the telephone).
Combined mode
(to leave the vehicle without ending the call)
USING THE TELEPHONE
From the contextual menu, select
" DTMF tones " and confi rm to use
the digital keypad to navigate in the
interactive voice response menu.
From the contextual menu, select
" Switch " and conform to return to a call
left on hold.
Interactive voice response
Consultation call
377
05 USING THE TELEPHONE
Directory
The system accesses the telephone's contacts directory, depending
on compatibility, and while the Bluetooth connection with it is
maintained.
With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a
contact to the directory of the audio system.
Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory
visible to all, whatever the telephone connected.
The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.
To modify the contacts saved in the
system, press MENU then select
" Telephone " and confi rm.
Select " Directory management " and
confi rm.
You can:
- " Consult an entry ",
- " Delete an entry ",
- " Delete all entries ".
Select " Directory " to see the list of
contacts.
Make a long press on SOURCE or SRC
for access to the directory
or press OK , and
select " Call " and confi rm.
06
Press to display the audio settings
menu.
The settings available are:
- Ambience,
- Bass,
- Treble,
- Loudness,
- Distribution: Personalised or Driver,
- Left / right balance,
- Fader (front / rear balance),
- Auto. volume.
Screen C
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys
©
system), is
an audio process which allows the sound quality to be improved
according to the setting chosen, corresponding to the position of the
listeners in the vehicle.
AUDIO SETTINGS
Select and confi rm " Other settings… "
to display the next setting in the list.
The Ambience, Treble and Bass audio settings are different and
independent for each sound source.
On-board audio: Arkamys
©
Sound Staging.
With Sound Staging, the driver and passengers are immersed in an
"audio scene" recreating the natural atmosphere of an auditorium:
truly a part of the scene and its surroundings.
This new sensation is made possible by software in the audio
system which processes the digital signals from the media players
(radio, CD, MP3…) without changing the audio settings. This
processing takes account of the characteristics of the passenger
compartment to produce optimum results.
The Arkamys
©
software installed in your audio system processes
the digital signal from the media players (radio, CD, MP3, ...) and
recreates a natural musical scene, with harmonious placement of
instruments and voices in the space in front of passengers, level
with the windscreen.
379
07 SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
Screen C
Dial
2
Media parameters
Choice of playback mode
Normal
1
2
3
Random
3
Random all
3
Repeat
3
Choice of track listing
By folders
2
3
By artists
3
By genres
3
By playlists
3
Call
1
Directory
2
Calls list
2
Voice mail box
2
Directory management
Consult an entry
1
2
Delete an entry
2
Delete all entries
2
Telephone management
Telephone status
1
2
Hang up
1
MULTIMEDIA TELEPHONE
Radio parameters
1
MAIN FUNCTION
Option A1
Option A11
Option A
Option B...
1
2
3
1
07
Vehicle diagnosis
1
Connections management
1
Search for a device
1
TRIP COMPUTER
BLUETOOTH CONNECTION
SCREEN MENU MAP(S)
PERSONALISATION -
CONFIGURATION
Define the vehicle
parameters *
1
Choice of language
1
Display configuration
Choice of units
1
2
Date and time adjustment
2
Display parameters
2
Choice of sounds
1
Brightness
2
* Depending on vehicle equipment.
381
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio,
CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Fader, Left-Right Balance) to the middle position,
select the musical ambience "None" and set the
loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD
mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
When changing the
settings for treble and
bass, the ambience
setting is deselected.
When changing the
ambience setting, treble
and bass are reset to
zero.
Choosing an ambience imposes settings for treble and bass. Modifying
one without the other is not possible.
Modify the treble and bass settings or the
ambience setting to obtain the desired sound
quality.
When changing the
balance setting,
distribution is deselected.
Choosing a distribution setting imposes a balance setting. Modifying one
without the other is not possible.
Modify the balance setting or the distribution
setting to obtain the desired sound quality.
The following tables contain answers to the most frequently asked questions.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the stored
stations do not function
(no sound, 87.5 MHz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened
to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the
vehicle is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
2 seconds in radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is
too frequent and always on the same route.
The traffi c announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any traffi c
information.
The radio station does not broadcast traffi c information. Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffi c
information.
The stored stations are
not found (no sound,
87.5 MHz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected. Press the BAND button to return to the waveband
on which the stations are stored.
383
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is
poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality. Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable
conditions.
The audio settings (bass, treble, ambience) are unsuitable. Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
I am unable to connect
my Bluetooth telephone.
It is possible that Bluetooth is switched off on the telephone or that the
telephone has not been made not visible.
- Check that your telephone has Bluetooth
switched on.
- Check in the telephone's settings that it is
"Visible to all".
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system. You can check the compatibility of your telephone
on www.citroen.co.uk (services)
The Bluetooth connection
is cut.
The battery of the peripheral may not be suffi ciently charged. Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
The message "USB
device error" is displayed
on the screen.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the memory stick (FAT 32).
A telephone connects
automatically,
disconnecting another
telephone.
Automatic connection overrides manual connection. Modify the telephone settings to remove automatic
connection.
The Apple
®
player is
not recognised when
connecting to the USB
port.
The Apple
®
player is of a generation that is not compatible with the USB. Connect the Apple
®
player to the AUX Jack socket
using a suitable cable (not supplied).
When I connect my
Apple
®
player or my
BlackBerry
®
to the
USB port, I have alert
messages on the current
consumption by the USB
port.
When charging, the current consumption of these smartphones is greater
than the rating of the USB port, which is 500 mA.
The hard disk or device
is not recognised when
connecting to the USB
port.
Some hard disks and devices need a power supply greater than is
provided by the audio system.
Connect the device to the 230 V socket, the
12 V socket or an external power supply.
Caution : ensure that the device does not transmit
a voltage greater than 5 V (risk of destruction of
the system).
When streaming, the
sound cuts momentarily.
Some telephones prioritise connection of the "hands-free" profi le. Delete the "hands-free" connection profi le to
improve streaming.
385
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
QUESTION ANSWER SOLUTION
In "Random all" play,
not all of the tracks are
played.
In "Random all" play, the system can only take into account up to
999 tracks.
With the engine off, the
audio system switches
off after a few minutes
of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio system switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too
high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal protection mode
leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of the CD.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
Index
Visual search - Alphabetical index
Exterior
Remote control 100-107
- opening / closing
- antitheft protection
- starting
- battery
Lighting controls 124-128
Headlamp adjustment 130
Guide-me-home lighting 127, 128
Welcome lighting 129
Directional lighting systems 131-132
Changing bulbs 261-265
- front lamps
- front foglamps
- side repeaters
Wiper controls 133-137
Changing a wiper blade 279
Door mirrors 94-95
Blind spot sensors 219-221
Doors 113-114
- opening / closing
- emergency control
Child lock 173
Electric windows 116-117
Alarm 110-112
Fuel tank 118-120
Misfuel prevention 121
Accessories 285-286
Roof bars 280
Braking assistance 178-179
Trajectory control 179-180
Tyre under-inflation detection 214-215
Tyre pressures 252, 295
Boot 115
Temporary puncture repair kit 248-252
Changing a wheel 253-259
- tools
- removing / refitting
Snow chains 260
Changing bulbs 266-268
- rear lamps
- 3
rd
brake lamp
- number plate lamp
Parking sensors 229-230
Parking space sensors 227-228
Towbar 283-284
Towing 281-282
389
Visual search
Interior
Boot fittings 154-157
- rear parcel shelf
- hooks
- 12 V socket
- torch
- lashing eyes
- storage compartment
Rear seats 92-93
Rear armrest / Ski flap 153
ISOFIX mountings 169-171
Child seats 160-168
Front seats 88-91
Seat belts 181-184
Airbags 185-190
Glove box 145
Deactivating the passenger's airbag 187
Interior fittings 144-153
- auxiliary socket / USB port
- cigarette lighter / 12 V socket
- portable ashtray
- front armrest
- mats
Panoramic windscreen 12
- blind
- sun visor
Instruments and controls
Instrument panels 38-42
Warning lamps 43-53
Indicators 54-56
Manual test 57
Setting buttons 58-61
- trip distance recorder
- lighting dimmer / black panel
- customisation of dials and screens
Stop & Start 216-218
Wiper controls 133-137
Trip computer 70-74
Door mirrors 94-95
Electric windows 116-117
Hazard warning lamps 176-177
Central locking 108-109
Black panel 60
Adjusting the steering wheel 93
Horn 177
Multifunction screens 64-69
Seat belt and front passenger airbag
warning display screen 182-183
Manual gearbox 203
Electronic gearbox 204-207
Automatic gearbox 208-211
Gear efficiency indicator 213
Parking brake 194-201, 202
Interior mood lighting 139
Rear view mirror 96
Emergency or assistance call 177, 299
Courtesy lamps 138
Ventilation 78-79
Manual air conditioning 80-81, 86
Digital air conditioning 82-86
Demisting / Defrosting
the rear screen 87
Audio system 355-385
Setting the date / time 67, 69
eMyWay satellite navigation system
301-354
Setting the date / time 67, 69
Lighting controls 124-128
Adjusting headlamps 130
Dashboard fuses 268-271
Memorising speeds 222
Speed limiter 223-224
Cruise control 225-226
Opening the bonnet 235
391
Visual search
Technical data - Maintenance
Running out of Diesel fuel 236
Checking levels 239-241
- oil
- brake fluid
- coolant
- power steering fluid
- screenwash / headlamp wash fluid
-
additive (Diesel with particle emissions filter)
Changing bulbs 261-268
- front
- rear
Petrol engines 290-291
Diesel engines 292-293
Dimensions 294
Identification markings 295
Bonnet 235
Petrol underbonnet 237
Diesel underbonnet 238
Checking components 242-244
- battery
- air filter / passenger compartment filter
- oil filter
- particle emissions filter (Diesel)
- brake pads / discs
Battery 274-277
Energy economy mode 278
Engine compartment
fuses 269, 272-273
A
ABS and EBFD systems ............................... 178
Accessories ..................................................285
Accessory socket, 12V ..........146, 147, 150, 156
Adjusting headlamps ....................................130
Adjusting head restraints ................................90
Adjusting seat belt height ..................... 181, 182
Adjusting the steering wheel ..........................93
Airbags, curtain .....................................189, 190
Airbags, front.........................................186, 190
Airbags, lateral ......................................188, 190
Air conditioning ...............................................34
Air conditioning, automatic .......................79, 82
Air conditioning, manual ...........................79, 80
Air filter .......................................................... 242
Air flow ............................................................34
Air vents .......................................................... 78
Alarm ............................................................. 110
Anti-lock braking system
(ABS) .......................................................... 178
Anti-pinch ...................................................... 116
Anti-theft .......................................................104
Armrest, front ........................................ 149, 150
Armrest, rear ................................................. 153
Ashtray, portable ........................................... 145
Assistance call .............................. 177, 299, 300
Audible warning ............................................ 177
Audio streaming
(Bluetooth) .................................. 341, 369, 371
Audio system ...........................................64, 355
Automatic illumination
of headlamps ...................................... 125, 128
Automatic operation of hazard
warning lamps ............................................ 177
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen
wipers ................................................. 133, 134
Auxiliary socket .....................................342, 368
Auxiliary sockets ........................................... 146
Backup starting ............................................. 275
Bat te r y ............................................ 242, 274 -27 7
Battery, charging ...................................276, 277
Battery, remote control ......................... 106, 107
Black panel......................................................60
Blind spot sensors ........................................ 219
Bluetooth (hands-free) .......................... 324, 370
Bluetooth (telephone) .................................... 324
Bonnet ........................................................... 235
Bonnet stay ...................................................235
Boot ............................................................... 115
Boot lamp .............................................. 140, 156
Brake discs ....................................................244
Brake lamps ..................................................266
Brake pads ....................................................244
Brakes ...........................................................244
Braking assistance system ........................... 178
Capacity, fuel tank ........................................ 118
CD .................................................................363
CD MP3 .................................................364, 365
Central locking ...................................... 102, 108
Centre console .............................................. 147
Changing a bulb .................................... 261, 266
Changing a fuse ............................................268
Changing a wheel .........................................253
Changing a wiper blade ........................ 136, 279
Changing the date .....................................64, 68
Changing the remote control
bat ter y ......................................................... 106
Changing the time .....................................64, 68
CH ECK ......................................................3 9, 57
Checking levels ......................................239-241
Checking the engine oil level ..........................54
Checking tyre pressures
(using the kit) .............................................. 248
Checks ..................................237, 238, 242, 244
Child lock ....................................................... 173
Children .......................................... 167, 169 -171
Child seats .................... 160, 161, 165-167, 172
Child seats, conventional .............................. 166
Cigar lighter ................................................... 146
CITROËN Localised
Assistance Call ...........................................300
CITROËN Localised
Emergency Call ..........................................300
Closing the boot .................................... 102, 115
Closing the doors .................................. 102, 113
Cold climate screen ......................................279
Colour screen .................................................. 68
Connectors, audio .........................146, 366, 368
Coolant level .................................................240
Courtesy lamps ..................................... 129, 138
Cruise control ........................................222, 225
Cup holder ..................................................... 147
B
C
393
Alphabetical index
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) ........336, 362
Date (setting) .............................................64, 68
Daytime running lamps .................125, 262, 264
Deactivating the passenger airbag ............... 186
Deadlocking .................................................. 103
Def ro sti ng .................................................. 87, 9 4
Diesel additive level ...................................... 241
Dimensions ...................................................294
Dipped beam .................................124, 262, 263
Dipstick ....................................................54, 239
Directional lighting ................................ 131, 132
Direction indicators ....... 127, 176, 262, 263, 266
Do or s ............................................................. 113
Doors emergency control ............................. 114
Doors, rear .................................................... 173
Door trays ...................................................... 144
Dynamic emergency braking ................194, 198
Filling with fuel ...............................118, 120, 121
Fitting a wheel ...............................................256
Fitting roof bars .............................................280
Fittings, boot .................................................154
Flashing indicators ................ 127, 176, 263, 264
Foglamps, Front ....................126, 132, 262, 265
Foglamps, rear ..............................126, 266, 268
Front seats ................................................88, 89
Fuel..........................................................34, 120
Fuel consumption ............................................34
Fuel filler flap ......................................... 118, 121
Fuel gauge .................................................... 118
Fuel tank................................................ 118, 121
EBA
(Emergency braking assistance) ........ 178, 179
Eco-driving .....................................................34
Eco-driving (advice) ........................................34
Economical driving ........................................34
Economy mode ............................................. 278
Electric window controls ............................... 116
Electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD) ........................................................ 178
Electronic engine immobiliser............... 104, 107
Electronic gearbox system ...........204, 216, 243
Electronic stability control (ESC) .................. 179
D
F
E
G
H
Gearbox, automatic ......................208, 243, 277
Gearbox, electronic ......................................277
Gearbox, manual ..........................203, 216, 243
Gear efficiency indicator ............................... 213
Gear lever .......................................................34
Gear lever, automatic gearbox .....................208
Gear lever, manual gearbox .........................203
Glove box ...................................................... 145
G.P.S. ............................................................ 310
Gui danc e ...............................................3 08 , 315
Guide-me-home ............................................ 128
Halogen headlamps ......................................262
Hands-free kit .......................................324, 370
Hazard warning lamps .......................... 176, 177
Headlamp adjustment ................................... 130
Headlamps, directional ................. 130, 131, 262
Headlamp wash ............................................ 135
Head restraints, front ......................................90
Head restraints, rear ....................................... 92
Heated seats ...................................................90
Heating ...................................................... 3 4, 8 0
Height and reach adjustment,
steering wheel ..............................................93
Emergency boot release ............................... 115
Emergency braking system .......................... 179
Emergency call .............................177, 299, 300
Emergency warning lamps ................... 176, 177
eMyWay ..................................................68, 301
Energy economy mode ................................. 278
Engine compartment ............................ 237, 238
Engine compartment fusebox .......................268
Engine, Diesel .......................120, 236, 238, 292
Engine oil level indicator ................... 54, 57, 239
Engine, petrol ................................ 120, 237, 290
Engines .................................................290, 292
Environment ............................................ 34, 107
Equipment settings .............................40, 64, 68
ESC/ASR ....................................................... 179
ESP ............................................................... 179
Fusebox, dashboard .....................................268
Fuses .............................................................2 6 8
Jack ............................................................... 253
JACK socket ..................................146, 342, 368
N
O
J
MK
Main beam ....................................124, 262, 263
Maintenance ...................................................34
Map reading lamps .......................................138
Markings, identification .................................295
Massage function ........................................... 91
Mat ................................................................ 151
Menu, main ...................................................358
Mini fuel level ................................................ 118
Mirror, rear view ..............................................96
Mirrors, door......................................94, 95, 219
Misfuel prevention ......................................... 121
Motorway function (direction indicators) ...... 176
Mountings for ISOFIX seats .........................169
MP3 CD .................................................364, 365
Music media players .....................................337
Keeping children
safe ...............160, 161, 165, 167, 169-171, 186
Key in ignition warning .................................. 105
Key with remote control ........100, 102, 104, 107
Navigation ............................................. 307, 308
Number plate lamps ...................................... 267
Oil filter .......................................................... 242
Oil level....................................................54, 239
Opening the bonnet ......................................235
Opening the boot .......................................... 115
Opening the doors ........................................ 113
Operation indicator
lamps .......................................... 46, 50, 51, 53
Labels, identification .....................................295
Lamps, warning and
indicator ............................................43, 50, 53
Level, brake fluid ...........................................239
Level, power steering
fluid ............................................................. 240
Levels and checks ................................. 237-241
Lighting bulbs
(replacement) ......................................261, 266
Lighting control stalk ............................. 124, 127
Lighting dimmer ..................................38, 39, 59
Lighting,
guide-me home ...................................127, 128
Lighting, interior .................................... 138, 139
Loading ...................................................34, 280
Load reduction mode .................................... 278
Locating your vehicle .................................... 104
Locking from the inside ................................. 108
Locking the boot............................................ 115
Long objects, transporting ............................ 153
Luggage retaining strap ................................ 154
L
Ignition ........................................................... 105
Indicator lamps, status .................................... 51
Indicators, direction ..............................176, 263
Inflating accessories
(using the kit) .............................................. 248
Inflating tyres ..................................................34
Inputs for audio
system .........................................146, 342, 368
Instrument panel lighting ................................59
Instrument panels ..........................38-40, 57, 61
Instrument panel screen ...................38, 39, 213
Intelligent Traction Control ............................ 179
Interior fittings ....................................... 144, 145
Interior mood lighting .................................... 139
ISOFIX .......................................................... 170
ISOFIX child seats ................................. 169-171
ISOFIX mountings.........................................169
I
Hill start assist ............................................... 212
Hooks ............................................................ 155
395
Alphabetical index
Paint colour code ..........................................295
Parcel shelf, rear ........................................... 155
Parking brake ........................................202, 244
Parking brake, electric ..........................194, 198
Parking lamps ............................................... 127
Parking sensors, front ...................................230
Parking sensors, rear....................................229
Parking space sensor ..................................227
Particle emission filter .................. 240, 241, 243
Passenger compartment filter ...................... 242
Personalisation ...............................................60
Player, CD MP3 .....................................364, 365
Port, USB ..............................................146, 366
Priming the fuel system ................................236
Protecting
children .........160, 161, 165, 167, 169-171, 186
Punc ture ........................................................ 24 8
Radio ............................................ 333, 334, 359
RCA sockets .................................................342
Rear screen (demisting) ............................ 87, 94
Recharging the battery .........................276, 277
Reduction of electrical load .......................... 278
Regeneration of the particle
emissions filter ............................................ 243
Reinitialising the electric windows ................ 116
Reinitialising the remote control ................... 106
Remote control .............................. 100, 102, 107
Removable screen
(snow shield) ............................................... 279
Safety for children ......................................... 173
Satellite navigation system ............................. 68
Screen, colour and
mapping ........................................40, 305, 345
Screen menu map .........................345, 379, 380
Screen, monochrome .............................64, 379
Screen, multifunction
(with audio equipment) ...................64, 68, 358
Screenwash, front ......................................... 135
Seat adjustment ........................................88, 89
Seat belts .............................. 166, 181, 182, 184
R
S
P
Removing a wheel ........................................256
Removing the mat ......................................... 151
Repair kit, puncture ....................................... 248
Replacing bulbs ....................................261, 266
Replacing fuses ............................................268
Replacing the air filter ................................... 242
Replacing the oil filter ................................... 242
Replacing the passenger compartment
filter ............................................................. 242
Replacing wiper blades.........................136, 279
Resetting the service indicator .......................56
Resetting the trip recorder ..............................58
Rev counter .........................................38, 39, 42
Reversing lamps ...........................................266
Risk areas (update) ....................................... 312
Roof bars ....................................................... 280
Routine checks .....................................242, 244
Running out of fuel (Diesel) ..........................236
Seat, rear bench .............................................92
Seats, electric .................................................89
Seats, rear ....................................................... 92
Selector lever,
electronic gearbox system .........................204
Serial number, vehicle ..................................295
Service indicator .......................................55, 57
Servicing .........................................................34
Setting the clock .......................................64, 68
Short-cut menus ...........................................306
Sidelamps ............................. 124, 127, 262, 266
Side repeater ................................................264
Ski flap .......................................................... 153
Snow chains ..................................................260
Spare wheel ..................................................253
Speed limiter .........................................222, 223
Speedometer ............................................38, 39
Spotlamps, side ....................................129, 265
Start ............................................................... 275
Starting the vehicle .......................105, 204, 208
Steering mounted
controls ...............................................304, 357
Stopping the vehicle .....................105, 204, 208
Stop & Start ........................................74, 83, 86,
118, 216, 235, 242, 274
Storage .................. 144, 145, 147, 149, 150, 154
Storage compartments ......................... 144, 147
Storage drawer ............................................. 152
Storage net ....................................................154
Stowing rings ................................................154
Synchronising the remote control ................. 106
Synthesiser, voice ......................................... 318
System, navigation........................................308
Under floor storage ....................................... 157
Under-inflation (detection) ............................ 214
Unlocking from the inside .............................108
Unlocking the boot ................................ 100, 115
Unlocking the doors ......................................100
Update risk areas .......................................... 312
USB Box ........................................................ 146
Vehicle configuration ..........................40, 64, 68
Ventilation ................................................. 78-80
Warning lamps .............................. 43, 46, 51, 57
Wash-wipe, rear ............................................ 137
Weights .................................................290, 292
Welcome lighting...........................................129
Window controls ........................................... 116
Wiper control stalk ........................ 133, 134, 137
Wiper, rear..................................................... 137
Wipers .............................................52, 133, 134
V
W
U
Xenon headlamps .........................................262
XT
Table of weights ....................................290, 292
Tables of engines ..................................290, 292
Tables of fuses ..............................................268
Tank, fuel ....................................................... 121
Technical data .......................................290, 292
Telephone .............................................324, 328
Temperature control for heated seats ............ 90
Temporary tyre repair kit...............................248
Ticket holder .................................................144
TMC (Traffic info) .......................................... 321
Tools ..............................................................25 3
Torch ............................................................. 156
Total distance recorder ...................................58
Towbar ...........................................................283
Towed loads ..........................................290, 292
Towing another vehicle ................................. 281
Traction control (ASR) .................................. 179
Traffic information (TA) ................ 322, 335, 360
Traffic information (TMC) ...................... 321, 322
Trailer ............................................................283
Trajectory control systems ............................ 179
Trip computer ...................................... 70, 72, 74
Trip distance recorder .....................................58
Tyre pressures ..............................................295
Tyres ................................................................34
Tyre under-inflation detection ..................57, 214
4Dconcept
Diadeis
Edipro
05-13
This handbook describes all of the equipment
available in the whole range.
Your vehicle will be fi tted with some of this
equipment described in this document, depending
on its trim level, version and the specifi cation for the
country in which it is sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without
any obligation. Automobiles CITROËN reserves
the right to modify the technical specifi cations,
equipment and accessories without having to update
this edition of the handbook.
This document is an integral part of your vehicle.
It should be passed on to the new user in the event
of sale or transfer.
Automobiles CITROËN declares, by application
of the provisions of the European regulation
(Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles,
that it achieves the objectives set by this regulation
and that recycled materials are used in the
manufacture of the products that it sells.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of this
handbook is prohibited without written authorisation
from Automobiles CITROËN.
Printed in the EU
Anglais
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualifi ed
workshop that has the technical information,
competence and equipment required, which a
CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
13DS4.0030
Anglais
